1

Michael Raduga

I
Near-Death Meditation for Beginners
First Edition
www.obe4u.com Translated by Peter Orange

The practice of phase states of the mind is the hottest and most promising pursuit of the modern age. Unlike in the past the notions of !out"of"body e#perience$ !near"death meditation$ !lucid dreaming$ and !astral pro%ection$ ha&e already lost their mystical halo and their real basis has been studied in minute detail from the most non"nonsense approach. 'o( this phenomenon is accessible to e&eryone regardless of their (orld&ie(. )t is no( kno(n ho( to easily master it and apply it effecti&ely. This te#tbook gi&es each and e&ery person something that pre&iously could only be dreamt about " a parallel reality and the possibility of e#isting in t(o (orlds. This book is for pragmatic people (ho are not used to taking anything on faith or reading about empty theories. The book only deals (ith (hat (orks in practice and nothing else. Proposals regarding translating and publishing this book and other (orks of M. Raduga may be sent to aing*aing.ru

Table of ,ontentsPart I Entering the Out-of-Body State Chapter 1 General Ba !ground The Essence of the Phase Phenomenon .hy Enter the Phase/ The 0ifestyle of a Practitioner 1lgorithm for Mastering the Phase Types of Techni2ues ,ontraindications Recommendations for Using the 3uidebook E#ercises for ,hapter 1 Chapter " Indire t #e hni$ues The ,oncept of )ndirect Techni2ues Primary )ndirect Techni2ues 4econdary )ndirect Techni2ues 4electing the Right Techni2ues 4eparation Techni2ues The 5est Time to Practice ,onscious 1(akening 1(akening (ithout Mo&ing ,ycles of )ndirect Techni2ues 6ints from the Mind 1ggression and Passi&ity 4trategy for 1ction Typical Mistakes (ith )ndirect Techni2ues E#ercises for ,hapter + Chapter % Dire t #e hni$ues The ,oncept of 7irect Techni2ues The 5est Time to Practice )ntensity of 1ttempts 5ody Position 8

7uration of an 1ttempt Rela#ation 9ariations of Using 7irect Techni2ues The Free"floating 4tate of Mind 1u#iliary Factors 4trategy for 1ction Typical Mistakes (ith 7irect Techni2ues E#ercises for ,hapter 8 Chapter & Be o'ing Cons ious (hile Drea'ing The ,oncept of Techni2ues )n&ol&ing 5ecoming ,onscious (hile 7reaming Techni2ues for 5ecoming ,onscious in a 7ream 1ctions to be 7one (hen 5ecoming ,onscious (hile 7reaming 4trategy for 1ction Typical Mistakes (hen Practicing 5ecoming ,onscious (hile 7reaming E#ercises for ,hapter : Chapter ) Non-autono'ous Methods The Essence of 'on"autonomous Methods for Entering the Phase ,ueing Technologies .orking in Pairs Technologies for )nducing the Phase 6ypnosis and 4uggestion Physiological 4ignals ,hemical 4ubstances The Future of 'on"autonomous Methods for Entering the Phase Typical Mistakes (ith 'on"autonomous Techni2ues E#ercises for ,hapter ; Part II Managing the Out-of-Body E*perien e :

Chapter + Deepening The ,oncept of 7eepening Primary 7eepening Techni2ues 7eepening through 4ensory 1mplification 4econdary 7eepening Techni2ues 3eneral 1cti&ity Typical Mistakes 7uring 7eepening E#ercises for ,hapter < Chapter , Maintaining The 3eneral ,oncept of Maintaining Techni2ues and Rules against Returning to the 5ody Techni2ues and Rules for Resisting Falling 1sleep Techni2ues against an Unrecogni=ed Phase 3eneral Rules for Maintaining Typical Mistakes (ith Maintaining E#ercises for ,hapter > Chapter - Pri'ary S!ills The Essence of Primary 4kills 7iscerning the Phase Emergency Return. Paralysis Fighting Fear ,reation of 9ision ,ontact (ith 0i&ing Ob%ects Reading 9ibrations Techni2ues for Translocating through Ob%ects Flight 4uper"abilities The )mportance of ,onfidence ,ontrolling Pain Moral 4tandards in the Phase 4tudying Possibilities and 4ensations Typical Mistakes (ith Primary 4kills ;

E#ercises for ,hapter ? Chapter . #ranslo ation and /inding O01e ts The Essence of Translocation and Finding Ob%ects 5asic Property of the Phase 4pace Techni2ues for Translocation Ob%ect Finding Techni2ues Typical Mistakes (ith Translocation and Finding Ob%ects E#ercises for ,hapter @ Chapter 12 3ppli ation The Essence of 1pplications for Phase 4tates 1pplications 5ased on 4imulation 1pplications 5ased on ,ontact (ith the 4ubconscious Mind 1pplication 5ased on )nfluencing Physiology Unpro&en Effects Use of the Phase by the 7isabled Typical Mistakes (hen Using 1pplications E#ercises for ,hapter 1A Part III 3u*iliary Infor'ation Chapter 11 4seful #ips 1 Pragmatic 1pproach )ndependent 1nalysis 1pproach to 0iterature Practice En&ironment Talking (ith 0ike"minded People The Right .ay to Beep a Cournal Chapter 1" Pra titioners5 E*perien es The 4ignificance of Other PeopleDs E#periences 1nalysis of 4elected PractitionersE E#periences E#ercises for ,hapter 1+ <

Chapter 1% Putting a /a e on the Pheno'enon 4tephen 0aberge ,arlos ,astaneda Robert 1. Monroe Patricia 3arfield 4yl&an Muldoon ,harles 0eadbeater Robert 5ruce Richard .ebster ,harles Tart Chapter 1& /inal #est 3ppendi* 1ssessment of PractitionersD E#periences Fchapter 1+G 1ns(ers to the Final Test Fchapter 1:G 1 4implified 7escription of the Easiest Method for Entering the Phase using )ndirect Techni2ues Take Part in Research The ,ell Phone Techni2ue 1ttentionH The 4chool of Out"of"5ody Tra&el 5rief 3lossary of Terms and 7efinitions

>

/ore6ord This guidebook is the result of ten years of e#tremely acti&e personal practice and study of the out"of"body phenomenonF the phaseG coupled (ith ha&ing successfully taught it to thousands of people. ) kno( all of the obstacles and problems that are usually run into (hen getting to kno( this phenomenon and ha&e tried to protect future practitioners from them in this book. This guidebook (as not created for those (ho prefer light empty reading. )t is for those (ho (ould like to learn something. )t contains no speculations or stories only dry hard facts and techni2ues in combination (ith a completely pragmatic approach and clear procedures for action. They ha&e all been successfully &erified by a &ast number of practitioners that often had no prior e#perience. )n order to achie&e the same result it is only necessary to read through each section thoroughly and complete the assignments. The book is beneficial not only for beginners but also for those (ho already kno( (hat it feels like to ha&e an out"of"body encounter and ha&e a certain amount of e#perience as this guidebook is de&oted not only to entering the state but also e2ually dedicated to controlling it. ,ontrary to popular opinion there is nothing difficult about this phenomenon if one tries to attain it (ith regular and right effort. On a&erage results are reached in less than a (eek if attempts are made e&ery day. More often than not the techni2ues (ork in literally a couple of attempts. Michael Raduga Founder of the School of Out-of-Body Travel January 11, 2 !

Part 1 Entering the Phase State

Chapter 1 General Ba !ground

#7E ESSENCE O/ #7E P73SE P7ENOMENON The term phase state For simply phaseG encompasses a number of (idely kno(n dissociati&e phenomena many of (hich are referred to by &arious terms such as astral or out-of-"ody e#perience. This concept also includes the more pragmatic term lucid drea$ing but does not al(ays e#ist in the sense and form implied by that e#pression. 6ence the term phase has been introduced to ease the study of phenomena that e#ist beyond habitual I and often unfair " associations and stereotypes. The term out-of-"ody e#perience is accurate to the e#tent that it describes the sensation felt by a person e#periencing the phase phenomenon. % phase has t&o pri$ary attri"utes' 1() practitioners possess full, conscious a&areness during the e#perience, and 2() practitioners recogni*e a genuine separation fro$ the physical "ody( 4imultaneously the degree to (hich practitioners percei&e the phase en&ironment affects the le&el of sensory e#periences therein (hich often occur in a higher form than the sensory e#periences of (akefulness. This concept is difficult to imagine (ithout firsthand e#perience of the phase. 1nd so it is not (ithout reason that this practice is considered to be a higher state of self"hypnosis or meditation and is often referred to under different names as the highest possible human achie&ement in &arious religious and mystical mo&ements Fyoga 5uddhism etc.G.

)n essence the phase is an une#plored state of mind (here one is unable to control and feel his physical body. )nstead his space perception is filled (ith realistic phantom e#periences. Interesting Fact! Sensations in the phase state can "e so realistic that practitioners &ho unintentionally enter phase often "elieve they are still in the physical "ody, that the e#perience is occurring in the &a+ing state( These types of unintended e#cursions $ost often occur at night or early in the $orning( )t is belie&ed that up to one 2uarter of the human population has encountered this phenomenon. 6o(e&er if &ariations and different degrees of intensity of the state are taken into consideration it may be safely assumed that e&eryone has encountered the phase. 4ince the phase is a rare sub%ect of study many (ho inad&ertently enter it do not reali=e (hat has taken place once they return to (akefulness. Many do not assign any significance to the occurrence of a phase en&ironment that is not fully formed because shallo( phases donDt lea&e the same %olting impression as deep states. Elusi&e as the phase may seem this is an e#tremely common phenomenon accessible to 1A

anyone (illing to consciously learn and apply the correct methods of achie&ing and maintaining the phase. (78 EN#E9 #7E P73SE: 4uch a 2uestion can only arise from not fully understanding the properties of the phenomenon and its nature. .hen one suddenly understands at a certain moment that he is %ust as real as he normally is and is standing some(here that is not in the physical (orld (ith his same hands and body and can touch e&erything around him and discern fine details such much emotion stirs up inside him that no 2uestions arise at all. This is the $ost a$a*ing e#perience that a person can attain, The initial phase encounter is al(ays %olting and sometimes frightening. 7epending on the indi&idual fear e#perienced during initial encounters (ith the phase occurs in about one"third of all cases. E&en &eteran practitioners encounter fear (hich speaks to the profound nature of the phase state. .ith time as rapture ebbs and emotions (ane thoughts turn from the fact of the phenomenon itself to(ards ho( to someho( use it. 1nd here a fantastically di&erse field of practical application opens up before the practitioner. These applications I (hich this book communicates I are not to be associated (ith the many unpro&en and dubious methods often described in sundry esoteric literature. The information presented herein is &erifiable practical and attainable. .hate&er the nature of the phase " a state of mind or perhaps an e#ternal e#perience " this is the sole opportunity to- &isit any part of the (orld or uni&erseJ see people (ho are out"of"reach in real life including relati&es the deceased celebrities and &arious creaturesJ communicate (ith the enormous resources of the subconscious mind and obtain information from itJ reali=e desires that are unattainable in real lifeJ model artistic productionsJ influence physiology and more. These are not dull e#periences. They are eminently personal and real. #7E ;I/ES#8;E O/ 3 P93C#I#IONE9 11

)t must be said that &arious diets e#ercises rituals and so forth do not produce noticeable supplementary effects to proper practice of the phase. 'aturally e#istent psychological and physiological comfort is of the utmost importance. Thus methods recommending o&ereating under"eating or tormenting oneself (ith &arious diets and strange e#ercises are useless and ultimately detrimental to a practitionerDs (ellness and balance in&ariably producing a negati&e impact to the effecti&eness of techni2ues taught in this guidebook. 1dditionally no meaningful association has been found bet(een practice of the phase and (hat may be construed as !bad habits$. Regardless of a lifestyleDs null effect on phase achie&ement a healthy acti&e lifestyle (ill al(ays be recommended to en%oy a good 2uality of li&ing. Interesting Fact! -f one "elieves that it is necessary to position one.s "ed &ith the head"oard facing the /orth&est or so$e other direction in order to have $ore effective out-of-"ody e#periences, then doing so &ill invaria"ly have a positive effect on results( 0o&ever, the issue at hand is not the positioning of the "ody, "ut a "elief that is a+in to an intention, &hich in turn is enor$ously i$portant( )t has been obser&ed that a regular and orderly lifestyle increases the fre2uency of genuine lasting phase e#periences. 4leeping normally and soundly is the most basic e#ample of a lifestyle choice that produces direct positi&e impact on results especially (hen a practitioner commits to a full nightEs rest se&eral times a (eek. 3;GO9I#7M /O9 M3S#E9ING #7E P73SE 1 no&ice practitioner must understand the procedure for learning and mastering phase entry. This procedure consists of se&eral primary steps each of (hich is a uni2ue science unto itself. 1+

1. The first and most important step addresses the techni2ues used to enter the phase state. )t is not necessary to master e&ery type of entrance techni2ue Fdirect indirect dream consciousnessG. 0earning and applying the easiest techni2ues pro&ides the necessary prere2uisites to more ad&anced methods. )f so desired it is possible to try more difficult entrance techni2ues in parallel (ith the mo&ing on to the subse2uent steps for mastering the phase. +. ,ontrary to popular opinion the need for conscious techni2ues does not cease upon phase entrance. )t is absolutely necessary to learn and apply methods for deepening the phase to achie&e a consistently hyper"realistic en&ironment. Failing to apply deepening techni2ues almost guarantees that e#periences (ill be dull uninteresting and subse2uent practice short"li&ed. Practitioners should immediately learn and apply deepening techni2ues after mastering any one entrance method. 8. The third step in&ol&es mastering techni2ues for maintaining the phase as (ithout them the a&erage person (ould ha&e phase e#periences of much shorter duration than is possible. .hen in the phase the 2uestion of ho( to lea&e it almost ne&er occurs. On the contrary one is normally thrust from it in the course of se&eral seconds if one simply does nothing. :. 1fter learning all the necessary techni2ues for mastering the phase state it is time to learn and apply methods of control (hich encompass the ability to translocate find and interact (ith ob%ects influence surroundings and so forth. ;. Once the pre&iously noted steps ha&e been accomplished a practitioner may proceed to apply phase e#periences to enhance e&eryday life. O&er the course of this guidebook (e (ill e#amine do=ens of these &aluable applications in great detail.

18

.ith basic skills mastered remember that practicing the phase is (orth(hile and effecti&e only (hen the results are consistent. )f a practitioner enters the phase only once a month the e#perience (ill be too emotional to allo( the obser&ation of important principles and methodologies. The phase should be encountered at least once a (eek. .orking to(ard a le&el higher than a (eekly phase entry is ambitious e&en beneficial. Realistically t(o to four phase e#periences per (eek might be considered the le&el of a grandmaster but this is far from the up(ard boundary. 1s a rule no&ice practitioners achie&e the phase less often than is desired. 6o(e&er (ith regular attempts success occurs more and more fre2uently (hich should help alle&iate any frustration resulting from failed attempts. #8PES O/ #EC7NI<4ES There are three primary types of techni2ues that make it possible to enter the phase- direct indirect and drea$ consciousness. These methods are performed (hile lying do(n or reclining eyes closed the body in a state of total rela#ation. Interesting Fact! Often, people have an out-of-"ody e#perience &ithout prior +no&ledge or 1:

"elief in the pheno$enon( -t 1ust happens, and a large "ody of evidence has "een gathered to support this fact( 2ven $ore interesting is that spontaneous e#periences often occur after a "rief study of $aterial a"out the topic, li+e this guide"oo+((( 3irect techni4ues are perfor$ed &ithout any noticea"le lapse in consciousness( 5hile practicing direct techni4ues, a lapse into sleep for less than 6 $inutes is not considered a "reach of the techni4ue( 5y definition direct techni2ues encompass the performance of specific actions for a pre"defined inter&al of time. 4uccessfully applied direct methods result in a phase entrance (ithout passing through any intermediary states. For @AK of the population these techni2ues are the most difficult because the mind naturally e#ists in an e#cessi&ely acti&e state. )t has been clearly pro&en (ithin the 4choolDs student body that no&ice practitioners do not benefit from beginning a training regimen (ith direct techni2ues. This is because direct techni2ues re2uire a thorough understanding and masterful application of indirect techni2ues in order to be effecti&e. The incorrect notion that the phase state is e#tremely difficult to enter is due to the fact that people are more often dra(n to the more difficult direct techni2ues. )t is al(ays better to approach direct techni2ues only after becoming e#pert in the use of indirect techni2ues. -ndirect techni4ues are techni4ues that are put into practice upon a&a+ening fro$ sleep( The effecti&eness of indirect techni2ues is not dependent on the length of the prere2uisite sleep cycle. )ndirect techni2ues can be used (hile e#iting a full nightDs sleep after a daytime catnap or follo(ing se&eral hours of deep sleep. The most important thing is that there is a lapse of consciousness into sleep before implementing the techni2ues. )ndirect techni2ues are the easiest techni2ues to practice (hich is (hy many practitioners use them to enter the phase. 4leep naturally pro&ides the mind (ith deep rela#ation (hich is often difficult to 1;

ac2uire by other methods. 4ince sleep is re2uired to perform indirect techni2ues it is a con&enient oft"occurring means to conduct e#periments (ith the phase. 'o&ice practitioners benefit greatly from the use of indirect techni2ues and learn firsthand the possibility of phase entrance. 3rea$ consciousness is ac4uired "y techni4ues that allo& entrance to the phase through &hat is co$$only referred to as lucid drea$ing( )n this case the phase begins (hen the a(areness that a dream is occurring happens (ithin the dream itself. 1fter becoming conscious (hile dreaming se&eral types of actions can be performed including returning to the body and rolling out (hich (ill be described later. .hen deepening techni2ues are applied in the conte#t of a conscious dream the sensory perceptions of the phase surpass those of normal (akefulness. Techni2ues that facilitate dream consciousness are usually categori=ed separately from methods used to perform out"of"body tra&elJ in practice ho(e&er it is apparent that the characteristics of dream consciousness and out"of"body tra&el are identical (hich places both phenomena directly in the phase. These practices are difficult because unlike other techni2ues they do not in&ol&e specific actions that produce instantaneous results. 1 large measure of preparatory steps must be obser&ed that re2uire time and effort (ithout any guarantee of results. 6o(e&er dream consciousness techni2ues are not as difficult as direct techni2ues. Moreo&er the ma%ority of practitioners (hether using indirect or direct techni2ues e#perience spontaneous a(areness (hile dreaming (ithout ha&ing to apply techni2ues aimed at dream consciousness. )n addition to the techni2ues described abo&e there are also non" autonomous means and tools- &arious de&ices programs e#ternal influences and so forth (hich can be used to enter the phase. )t is necessary to mention that these are only useful to practitioners (ho are able to enter the phase (ithout supplementary assistance. 1<

9arious chemical substances and herbal supplements ha&e been recommended to assist phase entrance though using them is unlikely to do any good and use of these has ne&er yielded the effect that can be achie&ed through unadulterated practice. 1s such the use of a chemical crutch is regarded here as completely unacceptable. CON#93INDIC3#IONS E#act scientific proof that entering the phase is dangerous I or e&en safe " does not e#istJ there has ne&er been an e#hausti&e controlled study to pro&e either supposition. 6o(e&er since the phase e#ists at the fringes of naturally"occurring states of mind it can hardly be assumed dangerous. 'otably the phase is accompanied by rapid eye mo&ement FREMG (hich e&ery human e#periences for up to + hours each night and this begins to e#plain the phase e#perience as entirely safe and natural. 1lready confirmed are the psychological influences of the phase on the physical mind and bodyJ namely the emotional effects that can occur during the onset of the phase state. Phase entry is a &ery profound incredible e#perience that may induce fear (hich is in&oked by a natural instinct for self" preser&ation. The phase can create stress. This is especially true for no&ices and those poorly ac2uainted (ith the nature of the phenomenon and techni2ues used to control it. .ithout kno(ledge and proper practice a fear"induced reaction can escalate into full" blo(n terror. 1fter all (hile in the phase fantasy 2uickly becomes reality and reticent fears can take on hyper"realistic 2ualities. .hen this occurs itDs not the phase en&ironment but the fear that is treacherous. )t goes (ithout saying that fear is a to#ic influence especially to sensiti&e souls the elderly and people (ith physical ailments like certain cardio&ascular conditions. This does not mean that persons in these groups should abstain from practicing the phase. The solution is to learn about and a&oid common stressors associated (ith the practice kno( the mechanics of controlling ob%ects and understand the principles of making an emergency e#it. 1>

3i&en the possibility of negati&e phase e#periences it could be ad&ised that practitioners limit the time in phase to fifteen minutes though it is 2uite e#ceptional to maintain the phase for such duration. Proposed time limits are entirely theoretical and moti&ated by the fact that natural REM does not normally last longer than fifteen minutes and at the risk of side effects due to the alteration of natural cycles e#periments directed at unnaturally prolonging REM are not recommended. 9ECOMMEND3#IONS /O9 4SING #7E G4IDEBOO= 7uring classroom instruction at the 4chool of Out"of"5ody Tra&el se&eral key factors are kno(n to produce positi&e and negati&e effects to(ard the likelihood of success during indi&idual practicePositi>e Effe t on Pra ti e 1ttenti&e thorough study of the course material ,onsistent (ork (ith practical elements. 7iligent completion of technical elements. 1 rela#ed approach to the sub%ect matter. Beeping a %ournal of all initial attempts follo(ed by recording successful phase entrances. 1dhering to the recommended number of daily entrance attempts. Regular attempts and practice. 1? Negati>e Effe t on Pra ti e 6asty and inattenti&e study of course materials. )nconsistent application of techni2ues. 1ppro#imating the techni2ues outside of recommended guidelines. 1 hysterical approach to the matter !idLe fi#e$. 1 lack of personal analysis (hen problems or a lack of success are encountered. E#cessi&e number of attempts per day. 4poradic practice regimen.

Understanding that the author kno(s his field (ell

!) also kno( e&erything ) need to and (ill do as ) (antM. This attitude is good only for those (ho ha&e a great amount of real practical e#perience. Reading a lot on the sub%ect or simply ha&ing kno(ledge of it is not e#perience.

E*er ises for Chapter 1

<uestions 1. .hich alternati&e states are included in the term !phase$/ +. 6o( does the phase differ from out"of"body tra&el/ 8. )s the perception of reality different in (aking life than in the phase (orld/ :. 7oes the phase ha&e applications to day"to"day life/ ;. .hat skills must be learned before proceeding to practical use of the phase/ <. 6o( many types of autonomous phase entrance techni2ues are there/ >. .hat is the difference bet(een direct and indirect techni2ues/ ?. .hich techni2ues are easiest for the ma%ority of practitioners/ @. )s it (orth trusting &arious de&ices and programs that promise to be able to help one enter the phase state/ .hy or (hy not/ 1A. 4hould one eat meat (hen practicing the phase/

1@

#as!s 1. +. 8. Try to remember if you ha&e e#perienced phase encounters in the past. )f you ha&e encountered the phase (hat type of techni2ue gained entranceJ direct indirect or conscious dreaming/ )f possible ask some friends and ac2uaintances about the sub%ect of out"of"body tra&el or conscious dreaming. 7o any of them remember a similar e#perience/ .hat (as it like/

Chapter " Indire t #e hni$ues

#7E CONCEP# O/ INDI9EC# #EC7NI<4ES 3enuine practice of phase entrance is best begun (ith the easiest most accessible methods- indirect techni2ues (hich are conscious actions performed upon a(akening from sleep. 4ome critics incorrectly assume that indirect techni2ues are not ideal and prefer to start (ith direct techni2ues. 6o(e&er doing so pro&ides no guarantee for success and results in a large amount of (asted time and effort. Starting practice &ith indirect techni4ues guarantees entrance into the phase( 1 specific uni&ersal techni2ue that suits e&ery practitioner is a myth since indi&iduals differ (idely in personality psychology and learning speed. 6o(e&er there is a relati&ely easy uni&ersal algorithm or procedure that accounts for the characteristics of each person and allo(s for the most rational effecti&e (ay to attain the initial phase entrances. This algorithm encompasses cyclic practicing of the indirect techni2ues co&ered in this chapter. .ithout e#ception these techni2ues " despite their &arying degrees of difficulty " are suitable for e&ery practitioner (ho (ishes to e#perience the phase. Results can be e#pected immediately follo(ing the first fe( attemptsJ ho(e&er to achie&e measurable results an a&erage of fi&e daily conscious attempts must be made. Making more than fi&e attempts o&er the course of a day is fine too. There is nothing difficult to understand about performing the techni2ues since they are clearly laid out and based on real internal processes. Re$ar+a"ly, due to correctly practiced indirect techni4ues, $ore than half of students at the live school attain phase entrance after only t&o days(

Interesting Fact! Many e#perienced practitioners prefer to "ypass the effort associated &ith direct techni4ues and hone their s+ills through the sole use of indirect techni4ues( )n order to ensure that oneDs efforts are most fruitful and producti&e (e are going to indi&idually e#amine each step and principle behind the actions in great detail. 0et us start from a description of the techni2ues themsel&es (hich (ill actually apply practically %ust as much to direct techni2ues as to indirect techni2uesJ as they only differ in character and length of application. There are plenty of techni2ues so after practicing all of the indirect techni2ues presented in this chapter a practitioner should be able to choose three or four of the most straightfor(ard indi&idually effecti&e methods. 4eparation techni2ues (ill be e#amined later. They are completely different from usual techni2ues (hich only bring one into the phase but do not necessarily themsel&es lead to separation from the body. )t is often also necessary to kno( ho( to stop percei&ing oneDs physical body after employing these techni2ues. )t is necessary to understand (hen to employ these techni2ues and the importance of (aking from sleep (ithout opening the eyes or mo&ing the body. 1ttempting to enter the phase immediately upon a(akening must be learned and practiced to mastery since it constitutes the main barrier to successful practice. 1fter e#amining the peripheral information surrounding indirect techni2ues the cycles of indirect techni2ues (ill be e#amined including (hat there are ho( they (ork and ho( they are best used. 4uccessful phase entrance is the direct result of performing these cycles. 6o(e&er there are e#ceptions and it is not completely necessary to proceed (ith these cycles if oneEs o(n mind someho( hints (hat e#actly one should start from (hich (e (ill also e#amine separately.

P9IM398 INDI9EC# #EC7NI<4ES /ota Bene, The techni2ues described belo( are the simple components of indirect techni2ue cycles. )mplementing each techni2ueDs description is far from effecti&e. Of the list gi&en belo( it behoo&es the indi&idual practitioner to choose the most comprehensible and interesting techni2ues then acti&ely study and apply the instructions for use. OBSE9?ING IM3GES #esting Indi>idual Effe ti>eness )mmediately after (aking from sleep remain motionless eyes closed. Obser&e the blank space behind the eyes for 8 to ; seconds and try to locate recogni=able pictures images or symbols. )f nothing appears during this e#ercise the techni2ue should be substituted. )f something appears continue to passi&ely obser&e the images. Mean(hile the images (ill become increasingly realistic literally en&eloping the practitioner. 7o not aggressi&ely e#amine the details

of the image or it (ill &anish or change. The image should be e#perienced as a panorama taking e&erything in. Obser&e the images as long as the 2uality and realism increases. 7oing so yields t(o possible results- the practitioner becomes part of the surroundings and has achie&ed the phase or the image becomes borderline or absolutely realistic and separation from the physical body is possible. #raining To train the use of this techni2ue lie do(n in the dark eyes closed and obser&e the blackness for se&eral minutes identifying any specific images that may arise from simple spots or floaters and then gradually transition to (hole pictures scenes or scenarios. .ith practice this techni2ue is &ery easy and straightfor(ard. 1 common mistake made during practice of this techni2ue is (hen the practitioner aggressi&ely attempts to con%ure images &ersus passi&ely obser&ing (hat is naturally presented. P73N#OM (IGG;ING @MO?EMEN#A #esting Indi>idual Effe ti>eness )mmediately after (aking from sleep remain motionless eyes closed. Try to (iggle a part of the body for 8 to ; seconds but (ithout using any muscles. )f nothing mo&es during the attempt try a different techni2ue. )f a sensation of (iggling occurs e&en in the slightest continue to employ the techni2ue stri&ing to increase the range of mo&ement as much as possible. This techni2ue should be performed &ery aggressi&ely not passi&ely. 1s soon as the range of mo&ement nears or e#ceeds four inches " (hich may take %ust se&eral seconds " the follo(ing situations may arise- one momentarily finds oneself someho( in the phase or the (iggled part of the body begins to mo&e freely. The occurrence of mo&ement during practice of this techni2ue allo(s the practitioner to transition to a separation techni2ue and attempt to lea&e the body. .hile practicing phantom (iggling strong &ibrations may occur amid (hich separation may be attempted. 4ounds also often arise

allo(ing the opportunity to practice listening in (hich can lead to phase entrance. The phantom (iggling techni2ue is not meant to produce an imagined mo&ement by a phantom body. The point of the techni2ue is to attempt the mo&ement of a physical body part (ithout using muscular action. That is the focus should rest upon an internal intention of mo&ement (ithout physical action. .hen the sensation occurs it differs little from its real counterpart and is often accompanied by hea&iness and resistance. 3enerally there is &ery little range of mo&ement at first but (ith concentrated effort the range of mo&ement noticeably increases. )t does not matter (hich part of the body is used to e#ercise phantom mo&ement. )t may be the (hole body or %ust one finger. 'either is the speed of the mo&ement important. )ncreased range of percei&ed mo&ement is the aim of the techni2ue. #raining To train the techni2ue of phantom (iggling rela# a hand for se&eral minutes (hile lying do(n eyes closed. Then aggressi&ely en&ision the follo(ing hand mo&ements (ithout mo&ing any muscles for t(o to three minutes each- rotating up"do(n left"right e#tending the fingers and dra(ing the fingers together clenching and unclenching a fist. 'o sensations (ill occur at first. 3radually the sensation of muscular action (ill become so apparent that the percei&ed mo&ement (ill be indistinguishable from real mo&ement. 7uring the first training attempts practitioners are often tempted to open their eyes to see if actual mo&ement is occurring I thatDs ho( real the sensation feels. ;IS#ENING IN #esting Indi>idual Effe ti>eness )mmediately after (aking from sleep remain motionless eyes closed. Try to listen to noise in your head. 7o this for 8 to ; seconds (ithout mo&ing and (ithout opening the eyes. )f nothing happens

during this period of time s(itch to another techni2ue. )f any sounds like bu==ing humming ra&ing hissing (histling tinkling or melodies occur listen attenti&ely. .ith results the sound (ill increase in &olume. 0isten in as long as there is some dynamism in the &olume of the sound. .hen the sound stops or the noise becomes loud enough a separation techni2ue may be attempted. 4ometimes the noise itself thro(s one into the phase (hile listening. 1t a certain stage sounds may be e#tremely loud and ha&e e&en been described as comparable to the roar of a %et"engine. The action of listening in consists of acti&ely and attenti&ely e#ploring a sound the (hole of its tonality and range and ho( it reacts to the listener. There is an optional techni2ue kno(n as for ed listening in (here it is simply necessary to strongly (ant to hear noise and mean(hile make intuiti&e internal efforts (hich as a rule are correct. Performed correctly forced sounds (ill intensify the same (ay as those percei&ed (ith the standard listening in techni2ue. #raining )n order to practice listening in lie do(n in a silent place eyes closed and listen for sounds originating in the head. These attempts are usually cro(ned (ith success (ithin se&eral minutes of trying and one starts to hear that noise that absolutely e&eryone has (ithin. One simply has to kno( ho( to tune in to it. 9O#3#ION #esting Indi>idual Effe ti>eness )mmediately after (aking from sleep remain motionless eyes closed. )magine the physical body is rotating along an a#is for ; to 1A seconds. )f no unusual sensations occur try another techni2ue. )f &ibrations occur during rotation or the mo&ement suddenly feels realistic then continue the rotation techni2ue as long as there is progress in the sensationDs de&elopment. There are se&eral possible outcomes (hen rotation is practiced. The imagined rotation is replaced by a &ery real sensation of rotating along an imagined a#is.

.hen this occurs a practitioner may easily lea&e the body. The other outcome is the sudden presence of strong &ibrations or loud sounds amid (hich separation from the body is possible. 7uring rotation separation has been kno(n to spontaneously occur and the practitioner enters the phase. #raining To practice rotation imagine re&ol&ing around the head"to"foot a#is for se&eral minutes (hile lying do(n eyes closed. )t is not necessary to focus on the &isual effects of rotation or minute sensations in the body. The key factor is the &estibular sensation that arises from internal rotation. 1s a rule many practitioners e#perience difficulty performing full rotation. One person may be limited to @A degrees of mo&ement (here another e#periences 1?A degrees. .ith consistent correct practice full 8<A degree rotation (ill occur. /O9CED /3;;ING 3S;EEP #esting Indi>idual Effe ti>eness )mmediately after (aking from sleep remain motionless eyes closed. Picture a s(ift compulsory fall into sleep for ; to 1A seconds and then return to (akefulness follo(ed by an aggressi&e attempt at separating from the physical body. 3enerally after performing this techni2ue the practitionerDs state of mind 2uickly transitions bet(een different states of brain. 4trong &ibrations often occur (hen emerging from this !pseudo"sleep$ (here the likelihood of separation from the body is increased accompanied the opportunity to practice other techni2ues. Resist actually falling asleep during this e#ercise. )n essence forced falling asleep is a trick on the mind designed to take ad&antage of the brainDs refle#i&e responses to actions that immediately induce semi"conscious states that allo( easy entrance into the phase. Employing it is especially effecti&e upon an e#tremely alert a(akening or after a mo&ement is unintentionally made upon a(akening. Forced sleep is 2uite simple. )t re2uires a cessation of internal dialogue shifting mental focus a(ay from e#ternal stimuli and a

strong desire for a 2uick reentrance to the sleeping state follo(ed by rene(ed (akefulness after se&eral seconds. )n order to understand ho( this is done it is sufficient to recall ho( one had urgently made oneself fall asleep before or ho( one had fallen asleep after ha&ing been e#hausted or after a long period of sleep depri&ation. 1 common mistake in practice occurs (hen people fall asleep after attempting the techni2ue forgetting the necessary desire to 2uickly return to consciousness. SECOND398 INDI9EC# #EC7NI<4ES S#93INING #7E B93IN #esting Indi>idual Effe ti>eness )mmediately after (aking from sleep remain motionless eyes closed. Make + to 8 s2uee=es straining the brain. This is kno(n as straining the brain. )f nothing happens try another techni2ue. )f &ibrations occur during this e#ercise try to mo&e the &ibrations around the body and amplify them by continuing to strain the brain. The stronger the &ibrations the higher the probability that a separation techni2ue may be applied. 4pontaneous separation may occur. .hile straining the brain a practitioner may e#perience the sounds necessary for transitioning to a listening in techni2ue. The &ibrations that arise from straining the brain are &ery striking. )f there is any doubt as to (hether the &ibrations happened then most likely a practitioner did not e#perience them. The &ibrations may be described as an intense painless electrical current mo&ing through or gripping the body. 1t times the sensation of a total numbing of the body is e#perienced. #raining To practice straining the brain lie do(n eyes closed and attempt to strain the brain. 7o not think about the fact that actually s2uee=ing the brain is impossible. The imagined straining should be spasmodic rhythmic. Practitioners may strain the entire brain or specific parts of it. 7uring the process a sensation of pressure or e&en real strain

arises in the brain. .ith @;K of practitioners this strain usually occurs (ithin the first fe( minutes of e#ercise. This techni2ue should be committed to memory (hen training so that it may be instantly recalled and practiced upon a(akening from sleep. Practitioners often make the mistake of unintentionally straining their facial and neck muscles instead of straining the interior of their heads. This error should be a&oided at all costs lest it become a habit that frustrates genuine practice. S#93INING #7E BOD8 (I#7O4# 4SING M4SC;ES #esting Indi>idual Effe ti>eness This techni2ue in&ol&es straining the (hole body and differs little from straining the brain. .hen a(akening from sleep make one to three attempts at straining the (hole body refraining from actually fle#ing any physical muscle. )f nothing happens try another techni2ue. 9ibrations may occur as a result and amplifying these by straining the body (ithout using muscles can induce a spontaneous separation from the body. .hen the &ibrations become strong enough attempt a separation techni2ue. 4ounds often arise during the &ibration (hich allo( for listening in and a subse2uent entrance to the phase. #raining To practice- (hile lying do(n eyes closed try to strain the entire body (ithout using physical muscles for se&eral minutes. Tingling internal pressure and a strain on the brain often occur during this e#ercise. Remember to a&oid straining any real muscles. )f physical strain occurs results may be forfeited in the critical moment of fruition. ?IS43;IB3#ION )mmediately after (aking from sleep remain motionless eyes closed. For three to fi&e seconds con%ure an intense desire to see and literally create a specific ob%ect. The ob%ect should be en&isioned at

rest about four to eight inches from the practitioner. 0imit the &isuali=ation to simple familiar ob%ects like an apple flo(er sphere or hand. 4ometimes it is useful to imagine an ob%ect floating %ust abo&e the eyebro(s instead of directly in front. )f nothing appears during this period of time a different techni2ue should be used. )f an ob%ect appears one should keep looking hard at it and at a certain moment one (ill reali=e that one is already standing ne#t to it some(here in the (orld of the phase. .hen the ob%ect becomes realistic one can also try to separate from oneDs body on oneDs o(n. SENSO98-MO#O9 ?IS43;IB3#ION )mmediately after (aking from sleep remain motionless eyes closed. )magine acti&e physical mo&ement for 1A to 1; seconds (hile touching an actual ob%ect and simultaneously e#amining the imagined details of the room. )f nothing appears during this period of time a different techni2ue should be used. )f real and imagined sensations become mi#ed then continue the practice until the imagined sensations o&ercome the primary senses. IM3GINED MO?EMEN# )mmediately after (aking from sleep remain motionless eyes closed. For ; to 1A seconds concentrate on &isuali=ing any of the follo(ing actions- (iggling (alking running somersaulting pulling a rope or s(imming. Try to imagine the mo&ement as a realistic and acti&e e&ent during the practice period. )f nothing happens a different techni2ue should be employed. )f results occur in the form of the sensation of mobility the imagined mo&ement should be continued until it becomes the dominant sensation. .hen the mo&ement achie&es primacy it is accompanied by translocation to the phase. )f such a translocation does not automatically occur a separation techni2ue is recommended. IM3GINED SENS3#IONS

)mmediately after (aking from sleep remain motionless eyes closed. For three to fi&e seconds en&ision that a specific ob%ect is being held in the hand. )f nothing happens a different techni2ue should be practiced. )f the impression of shape and (eight become apparent concentrate harder on the sensation trying to compound the e#perience. Once the ob%ectDs presence in the hand achie&es a realistic 2uality separation is possible. 6o(e&er it is preferable to continue handling the ob%ect. 1 practitioner is free to imagine any type of ob%ect that fits in the hand. E#amples include a telephone a drinking glass a remote control a ball a pen or a bo#. IM3GINED SO4NDS Upon a(akening (ithout mo&ing or opening oneDs eyes one should acti&ely try to hear a specific sound or (ord e.g. someoneDs name or a melody. )f nothing happens the techni2ue should be changed for another one. )f sound arises one should try to listen in to it. .hen it peaks in &olume one may try to separate. E8E MO?EMEN# )mmediately after (aking from sleep remain motionless eyes closed. Perform t(o to fi&e sharp left"right or up"do(n eye mo&ements. )f nothing happens the techni2ue should be e#changed for another. )f &ibrations occur separation may be attempted after efforts to intensify the &ibrations. DO# ON #7E /O9E7E3D )mmediately after (aking from sleep remain motionless eyes closed. For three to fi&e seconds &isuali=e a point in the middle of the forehead. )f nothing happens a different techni2ue should be used. )f &ibrations occur they may be intensified by using this techni2ue or by straining the brain facilitating separation from the body. 1lso sounds may arise that allo( the practice of listening in.

/E39 ME#7OD )mmediately after (aking from sleep remain motionless eyes closed. For three to fi&e seconds imagine something horrific and gra&eyard"related staying nearby something graphic macabre out of the (orst nightmare imaginable. )f nothing happens a different techni2ue should be employed. 6o(e&er acute fear may occur most likely forcing the practitioner into the phase (here a separation techni2ue may be applied. 1lternati&ely &ibrations or noise may arise and allo( the use of other indirect techni2ues. 1 common problem (ith the use of this techni2ue is that fear often makes the practitioner so uncomfortable in the phase that he desires nothing else than to return to (akefulness. 9EC3;;ING #7E P73SE S#3#E )mmediately after (aking from sleep remain motionless eyes closed. For three to fi&e seconds recall the sensations that accompanied a pre&ious phase e#perience. FThis only (orks if the practitioner has achie&ed phase entrance in the past.G Either nothing (ill happen and a different techni2ue should be used or these sensations (ill be recalled and separating from the body may be tried " if it doesnDt occur spontaneously. 9ibrations or noise may also arise during this techni2ue in (hich case listening in or straining the brain may be practiced. B9E3#7ING CONCEN#93#ION )mmediately after (aking from sleep remain motionless eyes closed. For three to fi&e seconds focus on breathingJ the rise and fall of the rib cage the inflation and deflation of the lungs the intake and escape of air. )f no results occur a different techni2ue should be used. )f &ibrations noise or spontaneous separation occur the practice of this techni2ue should be intensified and used to its full ad&antage.

SE;EC#ING #7E 9IG7# #EC7NI<4ES The ne#t step to mastering indirect techni2ues is choosing the right techni2ues that suit indi&idual predispositions. There is no point in going for one techni2ue or another only because they look interesting and because someone (rote a lot or spoke a lot about them. The choice should be based strictly upon (hat suits an indi&idual practitioner. Out of all of the enumerated primary indirect techni2ues practically only straining the brain (orks easily and 2uickly for @;K of practitioners. 1ll other techni2ues (ork immediately for only about +;K to ;AK of practitioners during initial training. 6o(e&er after se&eral training sessions each techni2ue yields results for >;K of engaged practitioners. One (ay or another e&ery practitioner should identify a certain set of techni2ues that (orks best. 1 set should consist of no less than three techni2uesJ four or fi&e is e&en better to allo( more options and practical combinations. 'on"(orking techni2ues should not be discarded (holesale by the indi&idual because they afford an opportunity to achie&e success through ne( pre&iously unresponsi&e e#periences. To ensure the correct selection of techni2ues each should be separately practiced o&er a period of at least three days. To this end one should e#periment (ith each of the primary techni2ues for + to 1A minutes before falling asleep or e&en during the day. )t is good to choose at least one secondary techni2ue practice. This regimen allo(s a precise determination of the techni2ues that (ill yield the best results for the practitioner. 7uring the process of selecting personali=ed techni2ues a practitioner learns and retains the techni2ues in an intimate personal (ay (hich positi&ely affects ho( techni2ues are used during critical moments. )t is (orth noting that the final selection of techni2ues should be &aried. For e#ample choosing both straining the brain and straining the body (ithout using muscles is pointless because they are practically one and the same. More often than not they (ill both either (ork or not (ork. This is (hy techni2ues should in&ol&e

&arious types of sensory perception- &isual audio kinesthetic &estibular imaginary sense perception and internal strain. Remember that priorities and goals change (ith time and that a techni2ue that fell flat during initial attempts may une#pectedly pro&e &aluable later on. 5e fle#ible. 'o set of techni2ues should be car&ed in stone. )n fact the set may change se&eral times o&er the first fe( (eeks as the practitioner disco&ers (hat produces the best indi&idual results. To close this section a list has been pro&ided detailing the most effecti&e indirect techni2ues. This list (as compiled (ith classroom data from the 4chool of Out"of"5ody Tra&el and may pro&e helpful in determining an effecti&e set of indirect techni2ues. #he Most Effe ti>e Indire t #e hni$ues at S hool of Out-ofBody #ra>el Se'inars Obser&ing )mages 1;K Phantom .iggling 1;K 0istening in 1;K Rotation 1AK 4training the 5rain ;K 4training the 5ody .ithout Using Muscles ;K Forced Falling 1sleep ;K Mi#ture of Techni2ues 1AK Other Techni2ues +AK SEP393#ION #EC7NI<4ES 0et us begin (ith a totally shocking fact- during one"third of successful indirect entries into the phase it is not necessary to perform any specific phase entry techni2ues as separation techni2ues are immediately successfulN This has been statistically pro&en at 4chool of Out"of"5ody Tra&el seminars and in the analyses of other sources. ,on&ersely an incorrect understanding of separation techni2ues may lead to undesirable conse2uences. )t is possible for a practitioner to enter the phase state and be unable to separate from the

body. Therefore it is &ery important to understand ho( separation techni2ues (ork since they are often a key to success. Interesting Fact! Relatively often, a practitioner &ill try to e$ploy separation techni4ues to no effect, ho&ever, he &ill later une#pectedly understand that he had "een lying in a different position than he sensed that he &as in, and in fact, it had only "een necessary for hi$ to stand up( This happens $ostly a$ong "eginners and is indicative of an incorrect understanding of separation techni4ues( 1t times a practitioner may only need to think about separation and it happens. This is a rarity (hich e#plains the e#istence of a (hole series of au#iliary techni2ues. The most important separation techni2ues are rolling out getting up climbing out and le&itation. 9O;;ING O4# .hile a(akening attempt to roll o&er to the edge of the bed or the (all (ithout using any muscles. 7onDt (orry about falling out of bed hitting the (all or be concerned (ith the details of ho( this techni2ue should feel. Cust roll. GE##ING 4P Upon a(akening attempt to get out of bed (ithout physical e#ertion. This should be performed in a (ay that is most comfortable for the practitioner. C;IMBING O4# .hile a(akening try to climb out of the body (ithout using any muscles. This techni2ue generally comes to mind (hen a partial

separation has been achie&ed through the use of other techni2ues or one part of the body has completely separated. ;E?I#3#ION Upon a(akening attempt to le&itate up(ard parallel to the bed. .hile attempting to le&itate do not (onder ho( it should be accomplishedJ e&eryone intuiti&ely kno(s ho( to le&itate from their e#periences in dreams. /3;;ING O4# Practically the same as le&itation- upon a(akening try to sink do(n through the bed. P4;;ING O4# 6ere upon a(akening try to e#it the body through the head as if escaping from a lidded cocoon. B3C=(39DS 9O;; 1fter a(akening try to perform a back(ards somersault o&er the head (ithout using any physical muscles. B4;GE #7E E8ESC Upon a(akening bulge out or (iden the eyes (ithout opening them. Frontal mo&ement to(ard separation may result. 4eparation techni2ues are united by a singular idea- nothing should be imagined mo&ement should be attempted (ithout the use of physical muscles. The techni2ues produce the same sensations of mo&ement felt in real life. )f nothing happens immediately after trying then the techni2ue is not going to (ork though it may deli&er results at a later time. 1 practitioner (ill instantly be able to

recogni=e if the techni2ue has (orked. 6o(e&er people are often unprepared for the realness of the sensations and think that they are making a physical mo&ement instead of reali=ing that a part or all of the body has separated. 1fter this unfortunate failure careful analysis helps to understand (hat happened and plan for a successful retry. )f separation (as incomplete or took place (ith some difficulty this is a signal that the techni2ue is being performed correctly. 4trength and aggressi&e effort are re2uired from this point to achie&e complete separation. For e#ample if some mo&ement began and then stopped after ha&ing made some progress then one should go back and mo&e e&en harder once again in the same direction. )n order to practice separation techni2ues lie do(n (ith the eyes closed and attempt all of them o&er the course of se&eral minutes. 4eparation has likely been accomplished if no muscles t(itch or strain and a sensation of mo&ement occurs. There (ill be a strong almost physically palpable internal effort to perform a mo&ement. 'aturally no physical mo&ement actually occurs and the practitioner remains prone and immobileJ ho(e&er at the right moment these actions (ill lead to an easy entrance into the phase. Interesting Fact! %ppro#i$ately 17 to 87 of the ti$e that the phase is practiced, one reali*es i$$ediately upon a&a+ening that one has already separated( This $eans that one $ay already go so$e&here and stand, lie do&n, sit do&n, etc( This is not ho&ever "eco$ing conscious in a drea$, "ut an actually a&a+ening( #7E BES# #IME #O P93C#ICE The key to practice is the 2uantity and 2uality of attempts made that hone a practitionerDs skills. There are se&eral (indo(s of time best suited for employing indirect techni2ues. To begin it should be stated that sleep follo(s a cyclical pattern. .e a(aken e&ery hour"and"a"half and then 2uickly fall asleep again

(hich gi&es rise to sleep cycles. Furthermore (e e#perience t(o primary stages of sleep- rapid eye mo&ement FREMG sleep and non" rapid eye mo&ement F'REMG sleep. 'REM sleep includes many internal stages. The more (e sleep the less the body needs deep 'REM sleep and the more time (e spend in REM sleep. Phase entrance is most likely to occur during REM sleep.

The best (ay to implement indirect techni2ues is by the deferred $ethod. The aim of the method is to interrupt a sleep cycle during its final stage and then disrupt it again after falling back to sleep (hich makes sleep light during the rest of the sleep cycle. 4leep accompanied by fre2uent interruptions can be put to producti&e uses. For e#ample if a practitioner FletDs call him CackG goes to sleep at midnight then Cack should set an alarm for < oDclock in the morning. Upon a(akening Cack should engage in some sort of physical acti&ity like going to the bathroom getting a drink of (ater or reading a fe( pages of this book. 1fter(ard Cack should go back to bed thinking about ho( (ithin the ne#t t(o to four hours he (ill (ake up multiple times and make an attempt to enter the phase during each a(akening. )f Cack goes to bed earlier then his alarm clock should be set back by that amount of time since si# hours of initial sleep is the optimal length of time. )f Cack sleeps less than si# hours then the second half of his nightDs sleep (ill be too deep. )f Cack sleeps longer than si#

hours then there (ill be little time remaining for attempts or Cack may not e&en be able to fall asleep. )f a practitioner naturally (akes up in a forceful manner it (ill be difficult to regain sleep. Thus it (ill not be necessary for the practitioner to get out of bed (ith the aid of an alarm. The practitioner should attempt to go right back to sleep. 'aturally the deferred method is most applicable in cases (here it is possible to sleep as long as a practitioner desires (ithout ha&ing to (ake up early. 'ot e&eryone en%oys such lu#ury on a daily basis but nearly e&eryone has days off (hen time may be set aside to practice the deferred method. -t is in large $easure due to the deferred $ethod that classroo$ courses at the School of Out-of-Body Travel allo& up to 298 of class participants to enter the phase in the course of a single &ee+end, The second most effecti&e (indo( of time for entering the phase is ordinary $orning a&a+ening( This generally occurs during light slumber follo(ing a full nightDs sleep. 1nother effecti&e time to practice indirect techni2ues is after a(akening from a daytime nap. Once again this type of sleep (ill be light and short (hich pro&ides the body needed rest (hile allo(ing memory and intention to be kept intact through the moment of a(akening. 1gain not e&eryone has the lu#ury of taking daytime naps but if such a chance arises then it (ould be &ery beneficial to take ad&antage of the opportunity. /ightti$e a&a+enings are the least effecti&e times for phase e#perimentation because the brain still re2uires a lot of deep sleep at this time. 1(akening at night the mind is 2uite (eak and hardly capable of any effort. E&en if some results are obser&ed a(akening often ends (ith 2uickly falling back asleep. This is not to say that normal practice of the phase cannot occur at nightJ it %ust (onDt be as effecti&e as at other times. The nighttime option is best for those (ho lack an opportunity to use other (indo(s of time for practicing the phase. Understand that (e a(aken at night e&ery @A minutes (hich is (hy a minimum of four a(akenings is almost guaranteed (hen sleeping e&en for %ust si# hours. .hen the practitioner kno(s about

this and stri&es to sei=e those moments (ith time he (ill actually sei=e them and take ad&antage of them. CONSCIO4S 3(3=ENING :onscious a&a+ening is (aking up (ith a particular thought in mindJ ideally a thought about indirect techni2ues. )n order to start using indirect techni2ues upon a(akening it is not sufficient to ha&e a cursory kno(ledge of the techni2ues to be used (hen (aking. 7ue to the peculiarities of the human mind and its habits it is not al(ays easy (hen (aking to recall any particular moti&e or idea. The goal of conscious a(akening is to practice instant action (ithout being idle after (aking up. Interesting Fact! There e#ists a "elief that the pheno$enon of outof-"ody travel is practically unattaina"le, and is accessi"le only to an elect fe& through practices that re4uire secret +no&ledge( 0o&ever, the greatest difficulty &hen trying to e#perience out-of"ody travel in a short period of ti$e lies only in i$$ediately re$e$"ering a"out the techni4ues upon a&a+ening &ithout $oving( This is all si$ple and straightfor&ard( But it is precisely this trifle that is the largest stu$"ling "loc+ &hen trying to e#perience such an unco$$on pheno$enon( This is not difficult at all for appro#imately +;K of the population. 6o(e&er for the other three"2uarters of the population this is an difficult barrier to entry that can e&en seem insurmountable. )f such thoughts arise one should simply understand that this cannot be so and that persistent attempts and training are the key solution. The reasons (hy people are unable to remember practicing the phase upon a(akening are- not being in the habit of immediately doing anything upon a(akening a desire to sleep longer a desire to

go to the bathroom being thirsty a desire to suddenly start sol&ing day"to"day problems and so on. ,onscious a(akening (ith the intent of attempting an indirect techni2ue should be a practitionerDs primary goal (hich should be pursued at e&ery cost. The speed at (hich the phase is learned and e#perienced depends on this. There are se&eral effecti&e tricks to learning conscious a(akening-ntention upon falling asleep' This is the &ery important to successfully achie&ing conscious a(akening. 1 &ery clear scientific fact has been pro&en by somnologists Fscientists (ho study sleepGupon a(akening people usually think about (hat they had been thinking about before falling asleep. This phenomenon is easy to obser&e if the sleeper is e#perience a serious life problemJ they fall asleep (ith the problem and (ake (ith it. 4o in a case like this if difficulties at the front of the mind are replaced (ith a desire to practice the phase this (ill produce the desired effect. )t is not necessary to think solely about conscious a(akening (hile falling asleep. )t is sufficient to simply affirm the intention clearly and distinctly e&en state the intention out loud. Practicing these types of conscious actions (hile entering sleep (ill do much to promote the success of indirect techni2ues upon a(akening. ;eneral intent' The more clearly a practitioner concentrates on the importance and necessity of (aking up and immediately remembering to practice the techni2ues the more solid the intent (ill become and the more likely the process (ill fulfill its role and actually lead to results. %ffir$ing desires' 4ometimes an internal intention is simply not enough for some people or they are unable to properly affirm one by &irtue of indi&idual characteristics. )n this case an affirmation of desires should be introduced at the physical le&el. This could be in the form of a note (ith a description of a goal placed ne#t to the bed under oneDs pillo( or hung on the (all. )t could be a con&ersation (ith friends or family about the particular desire or by repeatedly &ocali=ing the actions that need to be performed upon a(akening. )t could e&en be an entry in a diary blog or te#ting on a mobile phone.

%naly*ing unsuccessful a&a+enings( 1naly=ing unsuccessful attempts at conscious a(akening is e#tremely important. .hen remembering the failed attempt after se&eral minutes se&eral hours or e&en later in the day focus on it and resol&e to succeed during the ne#t attempt. 7eep e#ploration of the failure is highly effecti&e and practical since the practitioner is learning (hat (orks (hat doesnDt (ork and making healthy resolutions to(ard success. :reating $otivation' The greater the desire to enter into the phase to accomplish a goal there the 2uicker successful conscious a(akening is achie&ed. Moti&ation is be created by a great desire to do or e#perience something in the phase. )n general pre&ious &isits to the phase are great moti&ation but an uninitiated person does not kno( it and (ill need something to (hich they can relate. For some this could be a childhood dream of flying to Mars for others it could be the opportunity to see a lo&ed one (ho has passed a(ay for another it could be the chance to obtain specific information or influence the course of a physical illness and so forth. 1side from natural methods to achie&e conscious a(aking there are &arious de&ices and tools that facilitate a measure of success. These (ill be co&ered in ,hapter ; in the section describing non" autonomous (ays of entering the phase. The "est $o$ent for conscious a&a+ening is &hile e#iting a drea$( This is the $ost effective and productive ti$e to atte$pt separation or perfor$ing the techni4ues( 1t this moment physical a(areness of the body is at a minimum. 1(areness at the &ery end of a dream often occurs after nightmares painful e#periences in the dream falling dreams I any dream that causes a sudden a(akening. .ith time one should de&elop a refle# that enables one to perform planned actions at the moment of a(akening but (hen consciousness itself has not yet had time to return. This type of refle# is highly beneficial to sei=ing the most fruitful of opportunities to enter the phase. 7ue to &arious psychological and physiological factors it is not possible for e&ery person to achie&e conscious a(akening after e&ery sleep cycle. Thus there is no point in becoming upset if conscious a(akening does not occur e&ery time. E#periencing only + to 8

a(akenings per day is normalJ this is sufficient enough to attempt phase entrance + to ; times per (eek (hen practiced daily. )t is not (orth getting carried a(ay (ith an e#cessi&e number of attempts. 7uring the 4choolDs courses it has been noted that doing 1A conscious a(akenings or more Fsome students try +A or e&en 8AG o&er the course of one night and morning rarely yields results. This is due to the fact that if one sets oneself a goal that is desired so much that its reali=ation breaks the natural rhythms of the body one depri&es oneself of the intermediate transitional states that make the phase effecti&e. 1 practitioner may also 2uickly become emotionally e#hausted from the large number of attempts and be unable to push limits in the right direction. The upside is that one (ill simply tire out. )f that starts to happen it is better to calm do(n and try to approach the matter in a more rela#ed manner e&enly and gradually. 3(3=ENING (I#7O4# MO?ING 1longside remembering the phase immediately upon (aking another important re2uirement is a(akening (ithout mo&ing (hich is difficult since many people (ake up and mo&e. Upon a(akening scratching stretching opening the eyes and listening to real sounds should be a&oided. 1ny real mo&ement or perception (ill &ery 2uickly disintegrate the intermediate state and introduce reality the acti&ation of the mind and its connection to the sensory organs. 1t first a(akening (ithout mo&ing seems difficult or e&en impossible. 6o(e&er it has been pro&en that this is remedied for through acti&e attempts and the desire to achie&e set goals. People often claim that they cannot a(aken (ithout mo&ing that itDs an impossible e#perience. 6o(e&er after se&eral attempts it (ill happen and it (ill occur more and more fre2uently (ith practice. Thus if there is difficulty in a(akening (ithout mo&ement do not despair %ust keep trying. 4ooner or later the body (ill yield to the practice and e&erything (ill happen smoothly. 1(akening (ithout mo&ing is &ery important because for the ma%ority of people e#periments (ith the phase are not possible e#cept in the first (aking moments (here (aking (ithout mo&ing

sets the stage for successful indirect techni2ue cycles. Often a practitioner (ill make 1A unsuccessful attempts and mo&e (hile a(akening. Once the practitioner learns to consistently (ake calmly and gradually success 2uickly follo(s. 6o(e&er if an a(akening is conscious but (ith mo&ement that does not mean that the practitioner cannot immediately make an attempt to fall into the phase. 4uch attempts although they (ill be about ; times less effecti&e than usual should ne&ertheless be made 1ny opportunity to practice (hile (aking should not be (asted. )t must only be kept in mind that one must first neutrali=e the effects of the mo&ement in order to once again fall into an intermediate state. )n the case of mo&ement it is e#tremely helpful to begin practice (ith forced falling asleep. 0istening in also (orks (ell as does obser&ing images and phantom (iggling each performed passi&ely for ;"1; seconds instead of the standard duration of 8 to ; seconds. 1fter performing these cycling may begin. 1(akening (ithout mo&ement despite all its importance is not a goal in and of itself and also not (orth suffering o&er. .hen a(akening if there is great discomfort something itches a need to s(allo( arises or any manner of natural refle# it is better to deal (ith it and then act according to practices recommended (hen mo&ement upon a(akening happens. 'ot all mo&ements upon a(akening are real and if only for this reason alone (hen mo&ement occurs indirect techni2ues should follo(. Interesting Fact! <p to 2 7 of sensations and actions that happen upon a&a+ening are not real as they see$, "ut are phanto$( False sensations occur in (idely di&erse (ays. People often do not understand (hat is going on (ith them (ithout ha&ing e#perienced the phase. For e#ample a person may think they are scratching their ear (ith their physical hand (hen they are really using a phantom hand. 1 person may hear pseudo"sounds in the room on the street or

at the neighborDs (ithout noting anything unusual. Or a person may look around the room (ithout kno(ing that their eyes are actually closed. )f a practitioner recogni=es such moments for (hat they are they may immediately try to separate from the body. C8C;ES O/ INDI9EC# #EC7NI<4ES Thus far indirect techni2ues used for phase entrance and techni2ues for separation in the phase ha&e been co&ered. ,onscious a(akening and the best times to practice it ha&e also been e#amined. 'o( a specific algorithm of action for indirect techni2ues (ill be presented. Follo(ing this algorithm promises 2uick and practical results. 1lgorithm of 1ction upon 1(akening-

1D #esting Separation #e hni$ues 6ithin ) Se onds 0ike the pre&ious obser&ation of separation techni2ues a third of successful attempts (ith indirect techni2ues yield immediate success upon the attempt of a separation techni2ue due to the fact that the first seconds after (aking up are the most useful for entering the phase. The less time that has elapsed after a(akening the better.

,on&ersely if one lies do(n e#pecting something to happen chances 2uickly dissipate. Thus upon a(akening preferably (ithout first mo&ing a practitioner should immediately try &arious separation techni2ues like rolling out getting up or le&itation. )f a techni2ue suddenly started to yield results for appro#imately for ; seconds then separation from the body should be attempted. 4ometimes inertia difficulty or a barrier (ill arise during a separation attempt. 'o attention should be gi&en to these problems. )nstead resol&e to separate " decidedly and aggressi&ely climb out of the body. Beep in mind that trying to immediately separate upon a(akening is a skill of the utmost importanceJ one that is (orth honing from the &ery beginning ne&er forgotten. "D #he Cy le of Indire t #e hni$ues to 4se if One is 4na0le to Separate )f separation does not occur after se&eral seconds it most likely means that separation (ill not occur regardless of elapsed time in effort. This is (here the practitioner must resort to other techni2ues. The practitioner should already ha&e chosen a minimum of three primary or secondary techni2ues that suit a practical repertoire. 6ere is (here the techni2ues are put into action. /ota Bene, -n order to give a specific e#a$ple, &e &ill e#a$ine the use of three specific techni4ues, &hich should "e replaced &ith a tested and chosen set of techni4ues( The follo(ing operational techni2ues ha&e been used as e#amples- obser&ing images FaG phantom (iggling FbG and listening in FcG. 1fter an unsuccessful attempt at separating the practitioner immediately starts obser&ing the &oid behind the eyes. )f images begin to appear (ithin 8 to ; seconds obser&ation should continue (ithout scrutini=ing the images in detail or the image (ill e&aporate. 1s a result of this action the image (ill 2uickly become more and more realistic and colorful engulfing the practitioner. )f e&erything comes together correctly a sudden translocation into the picture (ill occur or (hen the picture becomes &ery realistic attempt to separate

from the body. )f nothing happens after 8 to ; seconds then the practitioner should transition to the techni2ue of phantom (iggling. For 8 to ; seconds the practitioner 2uickly searches the entire body for a part that can be (iggled. Or the entire period of time is spent in an attempt to (iggle a specific body part- a finger hand or leg. )f the desired effect occurs then the practitioner should continue (ith the techni2ue and achie&e the ma#imum possible range of mo&ement. 7uring this process a number of things can happen including spontaneous separation a successful separation attempt free mo&ement of the (iggled part or the presence of sound or &ibrations. 1ll of these e&ents are of great ad&antage. )f nothing (iggles o&er the course of 8 to ; seconds then the practitioner should mo&e on to listening in. The practitioner should try to detect an internal sound. )f the sound is there listen and try to amplify it. 1s a result the noise may gro( into a roar and spontaneous separation (ill occur separating through the use of a techni2ue (ill be possible or &ibrations (ill occur. )f no noise occurs o&er the course of 8 to ; seconds then the entire cycle should be repeated. )t is beneficial to e#amine the reason behind the use of a set of three indirect techni2ues. This is moti&ated by the fact that the body often reacts to techni2ues in &ery peculiar (ays. .ith one person a techni2ue may (ork one day and not (ork on another day (hich is (hy if only one techni2ue is used e&en a &ery good techni2ue that (orks often a practitioner can miss out on a lot of different e#perience through the lack of &ariety in practice. Thus a practical repertoire should consist of se&eral techni2ues. Interesting Fact! So$eti$es, the first techni4ue that &or+s for a practitioner never results in a repeat of phase entrance again, although other techni4ues that &ere not i$$ediately effective at the novice stages of practice later "egin to &or+ regularly and successfully(

%D 9epeating the Cy le of Indire t #e hni$ues )f the first cycle of 8 techni2ues does not yield any clear results this does not mean that all is lost. E&en if the techni2ues do not (ork they still dra( the practitioner closer to the phase state and it is simply necessary to continue using the techni2ues by again obser&ing pictures phantom (iggling and listening in I and repeating this process at least three times. 6a&ing performed one cycle of techni2ues one can easily go on to doing a second cycle a third one a fourth one and so on. )t is 2uite probable that during one of these cycles a techni2ue (ill suddenly pro&e itself e&en though it had not been (orking at all %ust a fe( seconds beforehand. 1 serious practitioner should commit to a minimum of : cycles. The problem lies in the fact that it is psychologically difficult to do something that has sho(n itself not to (ork and one may gi&e up taking further action e&en though one could be at the cusp of falling into the phase. Beep trying and then try again and againH There ha&e been cases (here it took t(enty cycles to produce results. 1 monumental effort yes but one (orth the outcome. &D /alling 3sleep 6ith the Possi0ility of #rying 3gainD )f a practitioner is unable to enter the phase after performing cycles and attempts to separate or e&en if e&erything (orked out it is still better to go back to sleep to facilitate subse2uent attempts. 1gain it is &ery important to go to sleep (ith a clearly defined intention of actually performing the cycles upon a(akening. 4uch intention &astly increases the probability that the ne#t attempt (ill occur soon. That is one should not fall asleep (ith an empty head and the desire to simply get a good nightDs sleep. )f using the deferred method then clear intention is mandatory as se&eral attempts are possible o&er the course of a sleep cycle. E&en if only a fe( attempts are made accompanied by decided and concentrated effort then the four steps described in the algorithm (ill undoubtedly produce entrance into the phase.

)n order to more effecti&ely use the system of indirect cycles it is necessary to discuss (hat to do if one techni2ue (orks and progress ceases during the cycle and phase entry does not occur.

First understand that if a techni2ue has begun to (ork only lack of e#perience and skill (ill pre&ent the phase. 4econd barriers are o&ercome by temporarily s(itching to other techni2ues. 0et us suppose that noise arising (hen listening in gro(s louder and louder and then peaks in &olume. )t (ould surely be beneficial to s(itch to forced falling asleep or obser&ing images for se&eral seconds and then return to listening in. The sound may then become much louder and pro&ide an opportunity to proceed (ith the techni2ue. 4ometimes it makes sense to break off se&eral times into &arious techni2ues and then return to the primary techni2ue that yielded some results. )t is often possible to simultaneously perform t(o or e&en three techni2ues and e#perience no negati&e effect to results. )t is also normal and natural to skip around from techni2ue to techni2ue de&iating from a specific plan of action. For e#ample sounds often arise during phantom (iggling. )n this case a practitioner may %ust

simply s(itch o&er to listening in. Other oft"encountered results pairings are- images from sound sound from rotation sound from straining the brain a strain on the brain from listening in &ibrations from rotation &ibrations from phantom (iggling and so forth. 3uring initial atte$pts at using cycles of indirect techni4ues, the pro"le$ of confusion during a critical $o$ent $ay arise, &hen a novice practitioner suddenly forgets e#actly &hat to do and ho& to do it( This is nor$al, and the solution is to i$$ediately do &hatever co$es to $ind( Results can "e achieved in this $anner( 5hen a practitioner is $ore rela#ed a"out the practice, such pro"le$s &ill no longer occur( 7IN#S /9OM #7E MIND 9aried cycles of indirect techni2ues is an almost mandatory precondition for getting the best result. There are some e#ceptions. 4ometimes through indirect indicators a practitioner may be inclined to begin (ith certain techni2ues regardless of (hat had been planned. These are a sort of hint from the body and the ability to use such cues plays an e#tremely important role in the use of indirect techni2ues because they enable a practitioner to substantially increase the effecti&eness of practice. 7int NoD 1C I'ages )f the practitioner becomes a(are upon a(akening that some images pictures or remnants from dreams are before him then he should immediately proceed to the techni2ue of obser&ing images (ith all of the results that arise from it. )f this does not lead to anything then cycling (ith a set of techni2ues should begin. 7int NoD "C Noises )f the practitioner reali=es upon a(akening that he hears an internal noise roaring ringing (histling and so forth then he should immediately begin from the techni2ue of listening in. )f this has no effect then cycles of indirect techni2ues ought to commence.

7int NoD %C ?i0rations )f a practitioner feels &ibrations throughout the body (hile a(akening they should be amplified through the use of straining the brain or straining the body (ithout using muscles. .hen the &ibrations reach their peak the practitioner can try to separate. )f nothing happens after se&eral attempts indirect techni2ue cycles should start. 7int NoD &C Nu'0ness )f a practitioner (akes to numbness in a body part phantom (iggling of that part should be attempted. )f no result is achie&ed after se&eral attempts cycling should be tried. Of course it is better to refrain from techni2ues if the numbness is &ery intense and causes substantial discomfort. 3GG9ESSION 3ND P3SSI?I#8 7uring the practice of indirect techni2ues including techni2ue cycles unsuccessful attempts may result in falling asleep or becoming completely a(ake. These results indicate a deficiency or e#cess of aggression. )f a practitioner usually falls asleep (hile attempting to enter the phase then more aggressi&e action is needed (hile performing indirect techni2ues. )f on the other hand most attempts end in a full and alert a(akening then aggression should be curbed and techni2ues should be conducted more slo(ly and in a more rela#ed manner. 5alance bet(een passi&ity and aggression is imperati&eJ the phase state is easily attained by those practitioners (ho find a stable medium bet(een passi&ity and aggression. The issue of aggression re2uires a closer e#amination. =uite often, atte$pts at indirect techni4ues are $ade leisurely, &ithout desire or real effort, to >chec+ the$ off the list?( Results $ore easily reali*ed if the practitioner possesses an aggressive desire to enter the phase( More often than not, practitioners lac+ aggressive desire, instead of having too $uch of it( Thus, each effort re4uires a distinct &ant to succeed(

S#93#EG8 /O9 3C#ION 4ome mistakenly belie&e that indirect techni2ues (ill produce 2uick easy results like a pill. 7espite the fact that the techni2ues described in this guidebook are the best means to entering the phase strong effort still needs to be e#erted. This is not important for some as e&erything comes 2uite easily to them but for others this is of great importance. )ndirect techni2ues (ill definitely (ork if practiced consistently and as described. )t has already been noted that in the ma%ority of cases making se&eral concentrated attempts upon a(akening (ithout mo&ement is sufficient enough to produce results. )t may take a lot of time and effort to achie&e phase entrance so practitioners (ho set goals and (ork diligently (ill be presented (ith a cro(n of success. 1ttempts are important in large measure not only for the final result but also for the process itself. 7uring practice the practitioner independently learns and sol&es issues that may not ha&e been understood in the guidebook. Other times the practitioner (ill encounter situations that ha&e ne&er been described at all. )tDs impossible to prepare a student for e&ery possible scenario so as a practitioner mo&es deeper into practice a uni2ue indi&idual perspecti&e and portfolio of e#periences de&elops (hich (ill certainly pro&e useful in the future. Until then diligent practice of the information presented in this book (ill ready a practitioner for that personal frontier. 1ctions in practice re2uire strict attention. 4tudy the techni2ues and selects those that (ork best. 4et the goal of consistent conscious (aking (ithout mo&ement. Make an ob%ecti&e of performing cycles of indirect techni2ues (hile (aking up day in and day out. 5ith such a clear course of action, the practitioner should never defocus his attention or dissipate his energy on other related actions, li+e, for e#a$ple, on direct techni4ues for entering the phase( )f the indirect techni2ues do not (ork in the course of se&eral days continue trying. The latest results occur in a matter of (eeks not months or years

like some sources maintain. 3oals are meant to be stubbornly pursued step"by"step firmly and diligently. )f no results occur after 1A to +A days it is better to cease practice for a (eek and take a rest and then return (ith a fresh resol&e to master the practice. )nterestingly enough it is e#actly during such a break that spontaneous entrances into the phase through the most di&erse methods occur. )f success is still elusi&e e&en after 1 to + months of trying then a thorough analysis of the regimen should be conducted to root out any ob&ious mistakes or deficiencies. )f o&ercoming them pro&es difficult or impossible s(itching o&er to direct techni2ues is not recommended since they pro&e much more difficult than indirect techni2ues. )nstead techni2ues for entering the phase through conscious dreaming should be practiced. )t is also not (orth skipping o&er problematic areas and trying to make up for mistakes by e#pending e&en more effort. For e#ample ignoring the precondition of a(akening (ithout mo&ing (ill pro&e fruitless. 5ypassing this re2uirement (orks for &ery fe( people. Facing e&ery problem head"on and (orking hard to break through (ill be richly re(arded (ith an unforgettable treasured e#periences. Beep tryingH #8PIC3; MIS#3=ES (I#7 INDI9EC# #EC7NI<4ES )nternal certainty that nothing (ill happen instead of belie&ing in positi&e results. 4topping the performance of techni2ues after an unsuccessful cycle (hen a minimum of four cycles should be practiced. ,onstantly a(akening to mo&ement instead of remaining still. Performing direct techni2ues in the e&ening. Total concentration on indirect techni2ues is re2uired from the morning on if a practitionerDs goal is access to the phase.

 Performing indirect techni2ues for an e#tremely long period of time F+ minutes or moreG. This is a complete (aste of time in most cases. 4(itching from techni2ues that ha&e begun to (ork (hen practice should be follo(ed through to the end. Passi&ely performing techni2ues instead of being determined and aggressi&e. Performing each techni2ue separately for too long a period of time e&en if the techni2ue does not (ork instead of s(itching to another techni2ue (ithin se&eral seconds. E#cessi&e thinking and analysis (hile performing indirect techni2ues (hich re2uire mental tran2uility and inner stillness. 4topping and concentrating on unusual sensations (hen they arise &ersus continuing the techni2ue that brought them about in the first place. E#tremely long anticipation upon a(akening instead of immediately performing techni2ues. Premature attempts at separating instead of performing phase creation techni2ues through to the end of progress. 6olding the breath (hen unusual sensations appear. 5e calm instead. Opening the eyes (hen the only recommended mo&ement is breathing or mo&ing the eyes behind closed lids. 5eing agitated instead of rela#ed. ,easing attempts to separate e&en (hen partial success is met. 4training the physical muscles (hile performing the techni2ues &ersus remaining physically motionless. 'ot practicing after an alert a(akening (hen techni2ues are best applied " especially in the e&ent of (aking (ithout mo&ement. Merely imagining the techni2ues instead of really understanding them and performing them if of course one is not performing rotation or other imagined techni2ues.

 4imply (iggling phantom limbs instead of employing a fi#ed determination to increase the range of mo&ement Falling right asleep during forced falling asleep instead of ha&ing the firm intention of continuing efforts (ithin only ; to 1A seconds. 4crutini=ing the details of images (hen using the techni2ue of obser&ing imagesJ the (hole image should be obser&ed panoramically lest it disappear. )ntentionally trying to force pictures (hen obser&ing images instead of looking for (hat is naturally presented. 4imply hearing noise (hen employing the techni2ue of listening in instead of attenti&ely trying to pay attention catch something and listen in.

E*er ises for Chapter "

<uestions 1. .hy are indirect techni2ues the easiest/ +. .hy (ill one techni2ue (ork for some people and not for others/ 8. 6o( many attempts are necessary in order to enter the phase/ :. .hen obser&ing images should a picture be con%ured/ ;. 6o( is phantom (iggling different from imagined mo&ement/ <. .here does sound come from (hile listening in/ >. 6o( is forced listening in different from normal listening in/ ?. .hen employing the techni2ue of rotation should one try to rotate or simply imagine the rotation/ @. .hat is physically strained (hen using the techni2ue of straining the brain/ 1A. 6o( is straining the brain different from straining the body (ithout using muscles/ 11. 4hould a practitioner fall asleep (hen using the forced falling asleep techni2ue/

1+. 1ccording to statistics from classes held at the 4chool of Out" of"5ody Tra&el (hich indirect techni2ues are the most effecti&e/ 18. .hy should one practice all of the primary techni2ues in a rela#ed state/ 1:. .hat helps practitioners to enter the phase one"third of the time (hile using indirect techni2ues/ 1;. )s le&itation the most popular separation techni2ue/ 1<. .hat is the essential difference bet(een indirect techni2ues and separation techni2ues/ 1>. 6o( does the separation techni2ue of rolling out differ from the indirect techni2ue of rotation/ 1?. )s it necessary to imagine anything (hile trying to separate/ 1@. .hen is the best time to use indirect techni2ues/ +A. ,an techni2ues that are traditionally used upon a(akening be attempted during the day/ 6o( effecti&e are these techni2ues during the day/ +1. )s becoming consciousness (hile dreaming the same as conscious a(akening/ ++. .hen employing indirect techni2ues does an inability to a(aken (ithout mo&ing ha&e an effect on oneEs practice/ +8. .hat are the components of the algorithm of cycling indirect techni2ues/ +:. .hat first step must be taken (hile cycling through indirect techni2ues/ +;. 6o( many different techni2ues should a cycle consist of/ +<. .hat is the minimum number of cycles that must be practiced/ +>. )f a lot of time has passed after a(akening is this good or bad for cycles of indirect techni2ues/ +?. .hat must be done if a techni2ue gets stuck at an unsatisfactory le&el of results/ +@. )f the cycles do not (ork (hat should be done/ 8A. .hat are hints from the mind/ 81. )n (hat cases is it necessary to introduce aggressi&e effort (hen performing indirect techni2ues/

#as!s 1. Try all of the primary indirect techni2ues (hile in a rela#ed state and single out 8 to ; techni2ues that seem to (ork. Repeat such training another couple of times on other days. +. Try all of the separation techni2ues in a rela#ed state. 8. 1chie&e one conscious a(akening follo(ed by cycles of indirect techni2ues. :. 1chie&e one conscious a(akening (ithout any physical mo&ement and attempt an indirect techni2ue. ;. Upon a(akening (ithout mo&ing perform a full cycle of indirect techni2ues and repeat this e#ercise until phase entrance is achie&ed.

Chapter % Dire t #e hni$ues

#7E CONCEP# O/ DI9EC# #EC7NI<4ES 3irect techni4ues for entering into an out-of-"ody e#perience are used &ithout the prere4uisite of sleep@ "y perfor$ing specific actions &hile lying do&n &ith the eyes closed( The ad&antage of direct techni2ues is that in theory they can be performed at any moment. 6o(e&er a large dra(back e#ists in the length of time it takes to master the techni2ues. Only ;AK of practitioners achie&e success after making daily attempts o&er a period of 8 to < (eeks. For some an entire year may pass before results are reali=ed. The difficulty in achie&ing results (ith direct techni2ues is not a problem of inaccessibility but the natural psychological characteristics of the indi&idual. 'ot e&eryone is able to clearly understand the specific nuances in&ol&ed (hich is (hy some (ill continually make mistakes. Many practitioners stri&e to master direct techni2ues right a(ay because they appear to be the most con&enient straightfor(ard and concrete techni2ues. 6o(e&er it is a gra&e mistake to begin attempting and mastering phase entrance from this le&el. )n @AK of cases (here no&ices begin their training (ith direct techni2ues failure is guaranteed. Moreo&er a &ast amount of time effort and emotion (ill be (asted. 1s a result complete disillusionment (ith the entire sub%ect of phase e#periences is possible. 3irect techni4ues should only "e practiced after $astery of the easiest indirect techni4ues or ho& to "eco$e conscious &hen drea$ing( -n any case, difficulties &ill not &ear one do&n after&ards, as it &ill "e e#ceedingly clear fro$ oneAs o&n e#perience that the phase is not a fig$ent of the i$agination( %lso, an advanced

+no&ledge of indirect techni4ues &ill $a+e it considera"ly easier to achieve direct entry into the phase( Ouality of the phase e#perience is not dependent upon the chosen entrance techni2ue. 7irect techni2ues do not necessarily pro&ide a deeper more lasting phase o&er indirect techni2ues. 7irect techni2ues are better suited for some practitioners and not others but this ban only be said for a minority of the practicing population. Mean(hile indirect techni2ues are accessible to absolutely e&eryone all of the time. )f a practitioner has decides to begin practice (ith direct techni2ues or has gained the necessary e#perience (ith indirect techni2ues the underlying principles of the techni2ues must still be learned. .ithout these nothing (ill occur e#cept coincidentally and in rare cases. The key to the successful use of direct techni2ues rests in achie&ing a free"floating state of consciousness. 6o(e&er (e (ill first e#amine a large &ariety of &ery useful aspects and factors that make direct entry into the phase much easier. First (e (ill e#amine (hen it is best to perform the techni2ues and ho( intensi&ely to e#ercise their practice. Then (e (ill e#amine the &ery important factor of body position and the no less crucial issue of ho( long the techni2ues should be performed. Then (e (ill briefly in&estigate the issue of rela#ation and then (e (ill immediately mo&e on to the actual direct techni2ues. Only after co&ering all of the abo&e are (e able to del&e into the issue of (hat a free"floating state of consciousness is and ho( to achie&e it. #7E BES# #IME #O P93C#ICE The issue of time is not important (ith indirect techni2ues since the ma%or prere2uisite is that they are performed immediately after a(akening occurs. )n the case of direct techni2ues the issue of timing is much more critical. 'aturally the best method for finding the right time to perform direct techni2ues is the same as indirect techni2ues I the deferred $ethod. 6o(e&er there are some serious differences here. First of all one may interrupt oneDs sleep at practically anytime of the night

or early morning. 4econd after ha&ing (oken up F;"1; min.G one should not fall back asleep but should immediately proceed to the techni2ues. 7irect techni2ues are many times more effecti&e (ith the deferred method than at any other time. This is due to the fact that (ith the deferred method the mind does not ha&e time to become 1AAK alert and it is easy to fall into the altered state of consciousness that (ill allo( results. .hen it comes to specific steps one should a(aken in the middle of the night either on oneEs o(n or (ith the help of an alarm clock. Then one should get up and do something for 8 to 1A minutes and then lie do(n again in bed and perform the techni2ues. )f it is probable that the practitioner (ill (ake up in too alert a state and thus not e&en be sleepy then the inter&al bet(een a(akening and performing the direct techni2ue should be shortened and fe(er things should be done during that period of time. )t should be noted that (ith this setup a free"floating state of mind plays a far lesser role that (ith other procedures. The second most effecti&e (indo( of time is "efore falling asleep at night (hen the practitioner goes to bed. 7uring this period of time the brain needs to shut do(n the body and mind in order to rene( its strength (hich has been e#pended o&er the course of the day. This natural process can be taken ad&antage of by introducing certain ad%ustments to it. 1ttempts at performing direct techni2ues during the day are less effecti&e. 6o(e&er if fatigue has already had a chance to build up by this time this can be taken ad&antage of because the body (ill try to fall into sleep. This is especially suited for those (ho are accustomed to napping during the day. 3enerally other (indo(s of time produce a substantially (orse result (hich is (hy one should start (ith performing direct techni2ues in the middle of the night or before a nightEs sleep. Only after such techni2ues ha&e been mastered (ill it be possible to e#periment (ith daytime attempts. IN#ENSI#8 O/ 3##EMP#S

The degree of enthusiasm that is de&oted to any pursuit is directly related to successfully reaching a goal. 6o(e&er it is &ery important to kno( (hen to ease up especially (ith the delicate matter of phase entry. One attempt per day using a direct techni2ue is sufficient. )f more attempts are made the 2uality of each attempt (ill suffer considerably. Interesting Fact! Many approach direct techni4ues as if digging a ditch' the $ore - the faster and the "etter( The result' do*ens of atte$pts that yield no fruit( 1 lot of practitioners belie&e that do=ens of attempts o&er the course of a day (ill yield the phase. This is not the path to success and (ill 2uickly lead to disillusionment (ith the practice. E&en if after a (eek or a month no results are seen direct techni2ues should be attempted only once daily. Persistent analytical and sensible stubborn resol&e to practice properly (ill produce the desired effect. D493#ION O/ 3N 3##EMP# )t is useless to attempt entering the phase using a direct techni2ue by lying in bed and resol&ing neither to sleep nor get up until the phase occurs. 4uch coarseness in handling delicate nature of the mind (ill produce nothing besides rapid emotional e#haustion. Rigid timeframes apply (hile performing direct techni2ues before a sleep or in the middle of the night. 7irect techni2ues attempts should only last 1A to +A minutes. 0onger durations inhibit sleepiness because the mind (ill concentrate too long on the techni2ues and the desire to fall asleep (ill dissipate resulting in insomnia that often lasts se&eral hours. O&erdone efforts negati&ely affect natural enthusiasm due lost sleep and being tired the follo(ing day (hich is compounded by the reality of a gro(ing number of failed attempts. )f direct techni2ues produce no effect o&er the course of 1A to +A minutes before sleep or in the middle of the night then it is better to

go to sleep (ith the thought that e&erything (ill (ork out another time. This is the positi&e outlook a practitioner ought to al(ays maintain. BOD8 POSI#ION .ith indirect techni2ues body position isnDt important since conscious a(akening regardless of body position is the goal. 6o(e&er the position of the body is crucial (hile practicing direct techni2ues. There is not an e#act body position that each practitioner should assume since once again indi&idual characteristics and instincts differ (idely. There are specific rules that allo( one to select the right position based on indirect indicators. Many hold a belief that the correct pose is that of a corpse I lying on the back (ithout a pillo( legs and arms straightened. This notion has probably been borro(ed from other practices claiming that it helps achie&e an altered state of mind. 6o(e&er this position seriously impairs the efforts of the ma%ority of practitioners. The corpse pose should only be used (hen it is probable that a practitioner (ill 2uickly fall asleep (hile performing techni2ues in this pose e&en though it generally pre&ents sleep. )f a practitioner e#periences difficulty falling asleep and is constantly a(ake (hile performing direct techni2ues then the most comfortable position for the indi&idual should be used. -f sleep co$es 4uite easily to a practitioner, a less natural position should "e ta+en( -f a practitioner e#periences fe&er gaps in consciousness &hen the techni4ues are perfor$ed and has a harder ti$e falling asleep, a $ore co$forta"le a position should "e used( 7epending on the situation there are many possible positions- lying do(n on the back on the stomach on the side or e&en in a half" reclined position. )t is possible that a practitioner (ill ha&e to change positions from one attempt to another introducing ad%ustments related to a free"floating state of mind. 9E;3E3#ION

5y nature one should clearly understand that direct techni2ues are in and of themsel&es rela#ation methods inasmuch as no phase can occur (ithout one being rela#ed. 1ccordingly one can go immediately into the phase (ithout any prior rela#ation. 4ince the most effecti&e (indo( of time for using direct techni2ues occurs before sleep and at night and lasts only 1A to +A minutes in any case additional time should not be (asted on trying to rela# nor should time for rela#ation be subtracted from the re2uisite 1A to +A minutes. ,orrect and 2uality rela#ation is a difficult pursuit and many go about it indi&idually producing an opposition to natural rela#ation. For e#ample many endea&or to rela# their bodies to such a degree that in the end the mind is as acti&e as it (ould be (hile trying to sol&e a difficult mathematical e2uation. )n this type of situation entering the phase is impossible. The body automatically rela#es (hen the mind is rela#ed. The body in turn (ill ne&er rela# if the mind is acti&e. Therefore it is better for beginners refrain from the trouble of the nuances of rela#ation and sa&e their energies for more elementary matters. )nstead of forcing a technical rela#ation a practitioner should simply lie do(n for se&eral minutes and this (ill pro&ide the best rela#ation. 0ying do(n acti&ates natural rela#ation processesJ the most po(erful kind. ,omplete peaceful rela#ation may only be coerced by those (ith speciali=ed in"depth e#perience. 3enerally these are people (ho ha&e spent a great amount of time and effort mastering trance and meditati&e states. Rela#ation in these cases should take no more than 1 to 8 minutes and no longer as because (hen a practitioner is e#pert at rela#ation it is sufficient to %ust think about it and it occurs. 1ll 2uality rela#ation techni2ues may (ell ser&e as direct techni2ues if a free"floating state of mind occurs (hile they are e#ercised. 1fter gaining the necessary e#perience (ith trance and meditation a practitioner of these mental arts may proceed to mastering the phase.

?39I3#IONS O/ 4SING DI9EC# #EC7NI<4ES Techni2ues used to gain direct entrance to the phase are e#actly the same as those used during indirect attempts. The only difference is in the method of implementation. The techni2ues are described in detail in ,hapter +. 6o(e&er since direct techni2ues mostly re2uire passi&ity not all techni2ues (ork e2ually (ell for both direct and indirect entries into the phase. For e#ample acti&e techni2ues like straining the brain cannot be used to gain a smooth entrance into the phase. 7irect techni2ues differ from indirect techni2ues in their implementation because of the slo( halting production of results that occurs from the beginning of a direct attempt through the end of it. )f upon a(akening something happens to (ork then this can practically al(ays lead to entrance into the phase. For e#ample the same phantom (iggling before sleep can begin 2uickly enough but range of mo&ement (ill not be easy to increase and the entire implementation of the techni2ue (ill rely on protracted rhythmic mo&ement. Results take much longer- ten minutes instead of ten seconds. These differences also apply to e&ery techni2ue described in this guidebook. 0ike the practice of indirect techni2ues to begin the practice of direct techni2ues a practitioner should choose 8 or : of the most suitable techni2ues from those that pro&e most effecti&e to the indi&idual. )n order to assist the practitioner a table has been pro&ided detailing the documented effecti&eness of the direct techni2ues-

#he Most Effe ti>e Dire t #e hni$ues at Se'inars of the S hool of Out-of-Body #ra>el Phantom .iggling 1;K Rotation 1;K 0istening in 1;K 9ibrations Foccurring amid the use of other 1;K techni2uesG Obser&ing )mages 1AK Mi#ture of Techni2ues 1AK 4imple separation Fusually mi#ed in (ith other 1AK techni2uesG Other Techni2ues 1AK The primary difference in (orking (ith direct techni2ues is the time that it takes to e#ercise each. )f testing a specific indirect techni2ue takes only 8 to ; seconds then in this case se&eral minutes (ill be spent. 7uration &aries depending on certain factors. There are three primary (ays of performing the techni2uesclassical se2uencing and cycling " similar to the cycling used (ith indirect techni2ues. To understand (hich &ariant should be used consider the follo(ing table?ariations of 4sing the (hen to 4se It #e hni$ues :lassical Bpassive) variation' " (hen learning direct One attempt of 1 techni2ue. techni2uesJ The techni2ue may be alternated " (hen a practitioner generally after each attempt. sleeps poorlyJ " if attempts lead to (aking upJ " if attempts (ith other &ariations occur (ithout lapses in consciousnessJ " if the body and consciousness are in a rela#ed stateJ Se4uencing B$iddle)' " used if falling asleep occurs

One attempt (ith + to 8 techni2ues for 1 to ; minutes. Techni2ues are alternated infre2uently. 1ggression fluctuates (ith the length of time that the techni2ues are performed. :ycling Bactive)' 1lgorithm of cycling 8 techni2ues like (ith indirect entry to the phase but performing each techni2ue for 1A seconds to 1 minute and not 8 to ; seconds.

(hile using the classical &ariation or if cycling results in becoming (ide a(akeJ " (hen a practitioner generally falls asleep 2uicklyJ " if the classical and se2uencing &ariations put one asleepJ " (hen one generally falls asleep &ery 2uicklyJ " can also be employed (hen e#hausted or sleep depri&edJ

1 practitioner should al(ays begin (ith the classical &ariation i.e. using one techni2ue o&er an entire attempt. 7ue to the unusual nature of the efforts in&ol&ed a beginnerDs enthusiasm may sustain a completely alert state. 0ater ho(e&er strong prolonged lapses of consciousness into sleep may occur. 6ere it may be necessary to increase the le&el of acti&ity by transitioning to the se2uencing &ariation. 4e2uencing is the primary &ariation used for direct techni2ues because of its elasticity in application. )t can be passi&e if o&er the course of 1; minutes (hen a practitioner alternates t(o techni2ues for fi&e minutes. )t may also be aggressi&e if used se2uencing three techni2ues for one minute. E&erything bet(een these t(o e#tremes allo(s proper practice of the techni2ues and selection of the best &ariation to achie&e a free"floating state of mind. )f falling off to sleep stubbornly occurs e&en (ith the acti&e form of se2uencing then one should start cycling through indirect techni2ues but performing each techni2ue from 1A seconds to 1 minute. 1s long (ork (ith the techni2ues is implied one should not torment oneself if one does not (ant to do something other(ise one may

2uickly tire out. E&erything should be a pleasure to do and not cause any e#cessi&e emotional tension. #7E /9EE-/;O3#ING S#3#E O/ MIND There are almost infinite descriptions of direct entry techni2ues offered in literature stories on the )nternet and at seminars. 4ometimes one description fundamentally differs from another. )n the ma%ority of cases ho(e&er common threads e#ist that unite almost e&ery description of a particular techni2ue- short lapses in consciousness memory gaps and drifting in and out of sleep all of (hich are hallmarks of the free"floating state of mind. 1fter any of these phenomena occur all manner of unusual pre"phase or phase sensations arise. 0apses in consciousness may last for seconds se&eral minutes or more than an hour. They may range from a simple loss of consciousness to entrance into a full"fledged dream. They may be singular and rare or may occur se&eral times o&er the course of a minute. .hate&er a lapse entails the mind attains a mode of operating that is ideal for phase e#perimentation pro&ided the practitioner is able to refrain from deep sleep and 2uickly return to a conscious (aking state. 'ot e&ery lapse of consciousness leads to the phase. The lapse must ha&e sufficient depth to be effecti&e. Thus (ith e&ery unsuccessful lapse another deeper lapse should be incurred.

The primary practical dra(back of the free"floating state of mind is the possibility of falling completely asleep during lapses instead of only temporarily dipping into sleep. Techni2ues are definitely necessary to ensure the desired result. 4uch techni2ues more or less fulfill an au#iliary function and thus one need not be strict about them. Interesting /a tF -t does not $atter &hich direct techni4ue is used@ as long as it leads to lapses in consciousness, success is possi"le( .hen performing the &ariations of the techni2ues a practitioner can begin to &acillate bet(een full alertness and complete asleep coming to and then nodding off again. To a&oid falling asleep re2uires a strong desire to return to (akefulness. This is accomplished by a strong resol&e on the part of the practitioner e&en if (hile performing a direct techni2ue drifting in and out of sleep occurs. The practitioner must firmly assert that at

the moment consciousness tapers off a(akening (ill immediately occur. On the other hand if lapses do not occur and are replaced by complete alertness the follo(ing tricks of the trade may help- full concentration on mental actions or con&ersely musing and daydreaming in parallel (ith the techni2ue being used. )t should be noted that these are only effecti&e at the initial stages of (orking (ith direct techni2ues since such techni2ues ha&e a strong sleep"inducing effect. )f direct techni2ues do not lead to light sleep or singular lapses after a long period of regular practice then it must be assumed that the practitioner is dealing (ith some appreciable error in techni2ue or in the length of performance. Regulating the number of lapses that occur may be modified by body position during practice or by changing the &ariation used (hile performing techni2ues. Entering the phase (ith a free"floating state of mind most often occurs as the result of three key factors. First one techni2ue or another may begin to (ork (ell during a lapse. 4econd nearness to the phase may une#pectedly manifest itself through sounds or &ibration after a lapse. 7uring this transitioning to techni2ues that correspond to the abo&e symptoms Flistening in straining the brainG may be applied. Third (hen e#iting a lapse it is sometimes easy to separate or 2uickly find a (orking techni2ue by paying attention to initial indicators. 0apses in consciousness are not bound to occur in 1AAK of cases. 6o(e&er stri&ing to achie&e lapses plays a &ery important role since they are not al(ays percei&able and a lapse occurrence is not al(ays ob&ious. They can be &ery short in duration or shallo(. Or they may not occur at all. 'onetheless properly applied techni2ues to produce lapses may gi&e entrance to the phase. 34EI;I398 /3C#O9S Using direct techni2ues in the e&ening or in the middle of the night take ad&antage of the bodyDs natural state of fatigue and for

practical purposes this natural tiredness may be amplified. For e#ample direct techni2ues more easily lead to success if the practitioner is considerably sleep"depri&ed. Moreo&er in such a state inducing a free"floating state of mind may be forgone. The most important thing is simply not to fall asleep immediately in addition to employing the appropriate &ariations (ith the techni2ues. .illful depri&ation of sleep is torturous and useless e&en though great results may be achie&ed by an e#perienced and kno(ledgeable practitioner in a se&erely fatigued state. 5eginners are better off approaching all forms of practice in a natural balanced (ay. 1n intense longing sleep is not limited to long periods of sleep depri&ationJ physical and emotional fatigues also play important roles. )n that case the most important thing is not to fall asleep (hen performing the techni2ues and thus one must select a more acti&e techni2ue &ariation than usual. S#93#EG8 /O9 3C#ION 7irect techni2ues seldom produce 2uick and clear results unlike entering the phase &ia becoming conscious (hile dreaming or through the use of indirect techni2ues. 1t first direct techni2ues produce sporadic results (hich is (hy the path of practice should not begin (ith direct techni2ues hoping for fast results. )t is better to systematically practice a techni2ue (orking to(ard mastery on a consistent basis. There is no cause for (orry if results are achie&ed after a month of daily attempts. 1 continual effort to analy=e practice and impro&e should be the primary focus because failures are al(ays caused by distinguishable mistakes. 1lthough difficulties may arise (ith direct techni2ues one should ne&er abandon (hat (orked until then Fi.e. indirect techni2uesG as this could temporarily depri&e one of the e#perience that one has gained so far. 1 combination of direct and indirect techni2ues should ne&er be used during the course of a single day since this (ould be detrimental to practical focus and enthusiasm. )t is better to separately perform

each type of techni2ue on different days. For e#ample direct techni2ues could be used before falling asleep during the (ork(eek (hile indirect techni2ues may be practiced during the (eekends (hen a practitioner has more chances to e#periment using the e#tra opportunities to sleep. #8PIC3; MIS#3=ES (I#7 DI9EC# #EC7NI<4ES 1ssuming an incorrect position (hen lying do(n. Performing direct techni2ues during the day (hen a practitioner is ine#perienced instead of in the e&ening or at nightJ Performing more than one attempt per day. Performing protracted rela#ation before the techni2ues e&en (hen this may play a negati&e role. Performing the techni2ues for too long (hen they should be e#ercised for no more than +A minutes. Forgetting to affirm a strong intention of a(akening during a lapse of consciousness. 0ack of a free"floating state of mind. This is mandatory Falling asleep during lapses in a free"floating state of mind instead of (orking to(ard multiple lapses (hile a(akening. Forgetting separation techni2ues and a(aiting some unkno(n e&ent upon emergence from a lapse instead of taking ad&antage of the moment. E#cessi&ely alternating the techni2ues in a primary repertoire instead of testing them in a planned and systematic manner. 6olding the breath (hen unusual sensations are encountered. 1l(ays be calm. 6alting practice (hen unusual sensations occur (hen it is necessary to continue (hat brought about the sensations. E#cessi&e e#citement (hile performing direct techni2ues. 0ack of aggression during attempts due to fatigue and sleep depri&ation.

 0ack of a clear plan of action. Understanding and planning the use of distinct &ariations of the techni2ues beforehand is crucial to the analysis of subse2uent errors in practice.

E*er ises for Chapter %

<uestions 1. .hich techni2ues should be mastered before proceeding to direct techni2ues/ +. 4hould results from the use of direct techni2ues be e#pected after se&eral days or a (eek/ 8. )s it better to practice direct techni2ues during the day or in the e&ening/ :. )s it correct to perform three direct attempts per day/ ;. .hich body position should be assumed (hen suffering from insomnia/ <. .hich body position should be used by a person (ho falls asleep 2uickly/ >. 6o( much time should be spent on a single direct attempt/ ?. .hen can direct attempts be made for a longer period of time than usual/ @. .hat is the best (ay for an ine#perienced practitioner to rela#/ 1A. ,an direct techni2ues substitute rela#ation techni2ues/ 11. ,an rela#ation techni2ues substitute direct techni2ues/ 1+. 6o( many &ariations for performing direct techni2ues are there/ 18. )n (hat case is the &ariation of se2uencing (ith direct techni2ues employed/ 1:. .hich techni2ue may not be used for direct entrance to the phase (ith the goal of creating a free"floating state of mind/ 1;. .hat happens to consciousness (hile in a free"floating state during direct techni2ues/

1<. 4hould a(akening be attempted if falling asleep occurred (hile using direct techni2ues/ 1>. .hat is the probability of entering the phase (ithout a free" floating state of consciousness/ 1?. .hat do unsuccessful attempts using direct techni2ues most often end in/ 1@. )s se#ual acti&ity before an e&ening attempt using direct techni2ue beneficial/ #as!s 1. ,hoose the best body position for direct techni2ues based on your indi&idual preferences. +. Use the classical &ariation of performing direct techni2ues until it phase entrance or falling asleep se&eral times. 8. Using a combination of &ariations for direct techni2ues achie&e a free"floating state of mind. :. .hen performing direct techni2ues try to achie&e no less than three lapses in consciousness before +A minutes elapse or before you fall asleep. Repeat this challenge until phase entrance is achie&ed.

Chapter & Be o'ing Cons ious (hile Drea'ing

#7E CONCEP# O/ #EC7NI<4ES IN?O;?ING BECOMING CONSCIO4S (7I;E D9E3MING The techni2ues for phase entrance &ia becoming conscious (hile dreaming are based on reaching consciousness and self"a(areness during a dream (hich regardless of dream 2uality can be transitioned into a fully reali=ed phase e#perience. ,ontrary to popular opinion ha&ing an out"of"body e#perience through dreaming differs little from other techni2uesJ the primary results of (hich may be persistently categori=ed as dissociati&e e#periences- being fully conscious (hile remo&ed from the perception of a physical body. The realism of a phase induced through becoming conscious in a dream does not differ from phases entered using other techni2ues and (hen deepened the phase offers more &i&id and lucid e#periences than those of e&eryday life. )f a practitioner becomes a(are of a dream (hile in it Fusually accompanied by a clear reali=ation that it is !%ust a dream$G then the phase is e#perienced from that moment for(ard. 5eginners often confuse the notion of becoming conscious (hile dreaming (ith induced dreaming. 1n induced dream is the dream of a specific topic pro&oked on demandJ this does not presuppose consciousness. Moreo&er not all practitioners clearly understand (hat it means to be fully conscious (hile dreaming. ,onsciousness (hile dreaming is al(ays present to some e#tent but it is necessary to be as conscious as one (ould be in a (akeful state. 1(areness is not possible as long as the plot of the dream continues. .hen full understanding occurs that e&erything around is %ust a dream a person drops the dream and starts doing only (hat he (ants to do at that

&ery moment. 1nd after a(akening he should not think that (hat happened (as absurd or une#plainable. 7uring the process of becoming conscious in a dream a practitionerDs actions must be completely subordinated to the desire to e#perience a 2uality phase. This is (hy upon becoming conscious in a dream proceeding to techni2ues related to deepening and maintaining is crucial. Techni2ues for becoming conscious in a dream differ &ery much in nature from other techni2ues and there are good reasons (hy these methods are differentiated from other practices like so"called astral pro1ection or out-of-"ody e#perience BOB2). 6o(e&er their characteristics differ &ery little in terms of results. The techni2ue"related peculiarities rest in the fact that specific actions are not re2uired to produce immediate concrete results. 1ll techni2ue"related elements are performed outside of (hen consciousness (hile dreaming occurs. This is because it is impossible to take some action if you are not conscious and do not reali=e that you are dreaming. 1ll efforts are directed at making that &ery reali=ation someho( occur. Interesting Fact! 2ven if a practitioner pays no heed to the techni4ues for "eco$ing conscious &hile drea$ing, "ut applies direct or indirect techni4ues, on average each fifth phase &ill still occur through "eco$ing conscious in a drea$( This has "een statistically proven at se$inars of the School of Out-of-Body Travel( Many stri&e to achie&e consciousness during each dream o&er the course of an entire nightJ ho(e&er this is rarely possible due to physiological barriers. There is a good reason that sleep and dreams are an important part of a human life. There is an important need to s(itch off not only body but also consciousness so that it may unconsciously sift and process the &ast &olume of information obtained in e&eryday life.

The timeframe for achie&ing conscious dreaming is &ery difficult to estimate due to the nature of re2uired actions. )ntensity and intention definitely e#ert hea&y influence. 1 practitioner may become conscious in a dream (hen first lapsing into sleep regardless of (hen it occurs. Or (ith regular attempts this could happen in t(o (eeks to a month. 'e&ertheless these techni2ues promise a much higher likelihood of success than direct methods and can be compared (ith indirect techni2ues " inferior to the latter only in terms of the speed at (hich results are achie&ed and the amount of effort re2uired. .hile indirect techni2ues yield ma#imum results in light of a full nightDs rest the amount of time spent in bed is not a significant factor to achie&ing dream consciousness. Therefore this techni2ue is sure to guarantee entry into the phase especially if difficulty has been encountered (hile practicing other techni2ues. Techni2ues used to attain dream consciousness should not be combined (ith other types of techni2ues. )t is better to focus on one thing at a time. -nterestingly, &hen a techni4ue is practiced on a regular "asis, there is nearly a 1 7 guarantee that drea$ consciousness &ill spontaneously occur( % practitioner $ust +no& ho& to react &hen this happens( #EC7NI<4ES /O9 BECOMING CONSCIO4S IN 3 D9E3M )t is possible to simultaneously practice se&eral techni2ues for becoming conscious in a dream since e&ery techni2ue is directly compatible and complementary to another. 9e'e'0ering Drea's There is a (ell kno(n and (idespread of fallacy that supposes that dreams do not occur for some people. E&eryone dreams but not e&eryone remembers their dreams. E&en those (ho acti&ely dream remember only a small fraction of these nightly e#cursions. 6ence one should not think that it is impossible for someone (ho does not remember dreams to become conscious in one. 4uch a person should simply try to use the techni2ues.

1t the same time there is a direct correlation bet(een the number of dreams remembered and the probability of becoming conscious (hile dreaming. That is (hy de&eloping the ability to remember dreams is crucial. )n essence the ability to achie&e dream consciousness rests (ith the conscious mind (hich is &ery much interconnected (ith memory"related processes. ,onsciousness is naturally inherent in dreams but it lacks rapid operati&e memory. 7reamers may kno( (ho they are their names ho( to (alk and ho( to talk but may not kno( ho( surrounding e&ents are related or the nature of their significance. 5y increasing the fre2uency of remembered dreams short"term dream memory becomes more de&eloped (hich enables more realistic dream e#periences follo(ed by a higher probability of dream consciousness. There are three techni2ues dedicated to increasing the number of remembered dreams. The first is to simply recall the details of dreams upon a(akening. .ithin the first fe( minutes of (aking up try to remember as many dreams from the night before as possible. This should be done (ith a great amount of attention and diligence because this e#ercise strengthens the memory. )f possible during the day or better yet before going to sleep at night recalling the pre&ious nightDs dreams once again is highly beneficial. .riting dreams do(n in a special dream %ournal is much more effecti&e than simple recall. Record dreams in the morning (hile memories are still fresh. The more details recalled (hen recording the dream the better the ultimate results. This is a &ery attenti&e approach that demands a higher a(areness than simple recollection. .riting dreams in a %ournal significantly increases a(areness of actions and aspirations. 1nother (ay of remembering dreams is to create a map of the dream (orld. This is called drea$ cartography and is similar to keeping a %ournal though an enhanced le&el of a(areness is de&eloped by connecting dream episodes on a map. First record one dream describing locations and e&ents (hich are plotted on the map. This cartographic process is repeated (ith each

subse2uent dream and after se&eral dreams an episode (ill occur that is someho( related to the location of a dream that has already been recorded. The t(o dreams that took place near each other are plotted ne#t to each other on the map. O&er time more and more interrelated dreams (ill occur and the map (ill become increasingly concentrated rather than disconnected. 1s a result the fre2uency and realistic 2uality of remembered dreams (ill increase and the dreamer (ill increase the ability to achie&e consciousness (hile dreaming. )t is best to set remembered dreams to memory after temporary a(akenings &ersus (aiting until morning. To accomplish this it helps to ha&e a pen and a piece of paper nearby so that a practitioner may 2uickly %ot do(n a phase or se&eral key (ords from the plot of the dream before falling back asleep. Using this information the ma%ority of dreams are 2uickly and completely recalled. The initial result from e#ercising these techni2ues is a rapid increase in the number of remembered dreams. .hen this number becomes significant Fany(here bet(een fi&e and 1A per nightG dream consciousness follo(s on a regular basis. Intention )ntention is crucial to the success of any techni2ue. .ith regard to dream consciousness its significance is multiplied. The creation of intention is ine#tricably linked to the creation of internal aspiration (hich has re&erberations in both conscious and unconscious states. )n reality an ele&ated degree of intention operates as a po(erful method of mental programming. This techni2ue is performed before falling asleep by affirming a strong desire to become conscious (hile dreaming. For best results alongside a strong clearly defined intention think through (hat actions (ill be taken (hen dream consciousness is achie&ed. Creating an 3n hor 4ince dream consciousness is not linked to specific actions that take place (ithin a dream and sensory perception continues to operate in the dream state it is possible to de&elop and use an artificially conditioned refle# to achie&e consciousness. The essence

of this techni2ue is to train the consciousness to uniformly react to certain stimuli that occur (hile being a(ake and (hen dreaming establishing a habit of specific response e&ery time a certain situation occurs. For e#ample (hile a(ake a practitioner may ask !1m ) dreaming/$ e&ery time they see an anchor. 1n anchor is any ob%ect that is often encountered (hile a(ake and (hile dreaming. E#amples of anchors include a practitionerDs o(n hands red ob%ects or running (ater. .hen first using this techni2ue a practitioner (ill be unable to 2uestion (hether a dream is in progress e&ery time a pre"established anchor is encountered. 6o(e&er (ith training and a strong desire this techni2ue 2uickly produces results. O&er time subconscious 2uestioning of the practitionerDs state becomes habit happening (hile a(ake and dreaming. The end result is dream consciousness. )t is important to note that one needs not only to simply ask this 2uestion but that it is also important to ans(er it mindfully trying to isolate oneself from surrounding e&ents in order to be able to ans(er it in an as ob%ecti&e and unpredetermined (ay as possible. Failing to ans(er ob%ecti&ely (ill al(ays result in a negati&e response FnoG and dream consciousness (ill not be achie&ed. Natural 3n hors )n addition to creating deliberate anchors that induce conscious dreaming natural anchors should be gi&en focused attention. These are ob%ects and actions that regularly cause dream consciousness e&en (hen consciousness is not desired. 5eing a(are of the e#istence of natural anchors actually doubles the chances of their appearance. The follo(ing e#periences are common natural anchors that are present in dreams- death sharp pain intense fear stress flying electric shock se#ual sensations and dreaming about phase entrance or the phase en&ironment. .hen attempting dream consciousness identifying natural anchors produces results nearly 1AAK of the time. One may try to start flying each time that one ans(ers the 2uestion. This is of course pointless (hen in (aking reality. 6o(e&er (hen dreaming this (ill most likely lead to flight and once again pro&e that e&erything around is %ust a dream.

Self-3nalysis ,onsistent analysis of dreams helps to ascertain reasons for an absence of conscious a(areness- these analyses are significant to attaining dream consciousness. O&er the course of a lifetime the mind gro(s accustomed to the parado#ical nature of dreams and pays less attention to them. This becomes apparent (hile trying to understand that a red crocodile is unable to talk cannot be red nor can it rent an apartment. .hile dreaming these impossibilities are ne&er called into 2uestion. The essence of self"analysis is remembering dreams and thinking hard about (hy their parado#ical features had not been ade2uately recogni=ed in the dream state. .ith e#perience the e&eryday analysis of the correspondence of dreams to reality begins to ha&e an effect on a practitionerDs reasoning (ithin the dream state. For e#ample that red crocodileDs presence in a rented apartment could cause doubts that gi&e pause for reflection (hich could in turn lead to the understanding that e&erything happening is %ust a dream. 3C#IONS #O BE DONE (7EN BECOMING CONSCIO4S (7I;E D9E3MING To ensure that dream consciousness leads to a fully de&eloped phase e#perience one of three specific actions must be taken. The best is the techni2ue is deepening (hich should be immediately applied once dream consciousness occurs. 7eepening must be performed (ithin the dream episode before all other techni2ues. 7oing so &irtually guarantees entrance to the phase. The choice of actions that follo( deepening is dependent upon a practitionerDs predetermined course of plan in the phase. .hen becoming conscious (hile dreaming it is 2uite dangerous to try to return to oneDs body in order to roll out of it right a(ay unless one has deepened beforehand. This could result in a situation (here after ha&ing easily returned to oneDs body one (ould not be able to separate from it as the phase becomes significantly (eaker (hen physical sensations coincide (ith the position of a real body. )f

one is to employ such an option then in order to return to oneDs body one should simply think about it (hich is often sufficient to make the transition occur almost immediately. 1nother option is the use of translocation techni2ues to arri&e at a desired place (ithin the phase (orld. )t is also dangerous to employ this &ariation (ithout first deepeningJ translocating in a shallo( phase makes a return to the (akeful state &ery likely. Translocation is often accompanied by a substantial decrease in the depth of the phase state. S#93#EG8 /O9 3C#ION To achie&e dream consciousness constant practice is highly necessary because sporadic practice (ill fail to de&elop the re2uisite background thought processes. 1s a rule employing phase entry techni2ues (ithin the conte#t of dream consciousness produces results after se&eral (eeks and the effects of the techni2ues are increasingly pronounced (ith time. )f there are no results (ithin a month or t(o refrain from these techni2ues for a period of time take a break for a (eek or t(o and resol&e to assume a fresh start later. Practitioners often stop using these techni2ues after initial results as later effects become elusi&e and the fre2uency of dream consciousness rapidly declines. These techni2ues should not be abandoned after first yielding results though a gradual decrease in practice is generally acceptable. #8PIC3; MIS#3=ES (7EN P93C#ICING BECOMING CONSCIO4S (7I;E D9E3MING Percei&ing the state of dream consciousness as a non"phase state e&en though this phenomenon is one and the same (ith the phase. 1ttempting dream consciousness (hile performing other phase entrance techni2ues (hen it is better to focus on dream consciousness alone.

 .hen falling asleep lacking sufficient desire to e#perience conscious dreaming e&en though this is critical. ,ontinuing to yield to the plot of a dream e&en after achie&ing dream consciousness (hereas subse2uent actions must be independent and based on free (ill. )ncorrectly ans(ering the 2uestion !1m ) dreaming/$ (hile dreaming. Forgetting to immediately begin deepening techni2ues (hen dream consciousness has been achie&ed. .hen e#ercising memory de&elopment recalling the most &i&id dreams instead of e&ery dream. )nconsistent concentration (hile practicing dream consciousness techni2ues.

E*er ises for Chapter &

<uestions 1. .hat is the difference bet(een an out"of"body e#perience and dream consciousness/ +. 1fter attaining dream consciousness does the realistic 2uality of the surroundings differ from that of (akefulness/ 8. .hich techni2ue can be used in a dream to become conscious in it/ :. )s it possible to achie&e dream consciousness after the first attempt/ ;. )s it true that not all people dream/ <. .hy is learning to remember as many dreams as possible important for becoming conscious (hile dreaming/ >. .hat is dream cartography/ ?. To e#perience dream consciousness (hat must be done (hile falling asleep/ @. ,ould a tape measure become an anchor used to achie&e dream consciousness/

1A. .hat e#periences in dreams often spontaneously gi&e rise to a state of conscious a(areness/ 11. .hat must immediately be done after becoming conscious (hile dreaming/ #as!s 1. E&ery day immediately before going to sleep culti&ate a strong desire to become conscious in future dreams. +. .hen you (ake up recall or (rite do(n the episodes and plots of your dreams e&ery day. 8. Try to achie&e at least one instance of dream consciousness.

Chapter ) Non-autono'ous Methods

#7E ESSENCE O/ NON-34#ONOMO4S ME#7ODS /O9 EN#E9ING #7E P73SE /on-autono$ous $ethods of entering the phase are various types of e#ternal influences that are a"le to help put a practitioner into the phase state( ,omputer programs de&ices &arious physical actions the aid of a helper or e&en chemical substances are e#amples of non" autonomous methods. )n certain cases these methods actually help (hile some hinder the possibility of a genuine phase e#perience. 'e&er count on a magical substance or machine to automatically eliminate the difficulties associated (ith phase entrance. )f such a substance e#isted the (hole topic of phase e#perimentation (ould e#ist at an ad&anced le&el of de&elopment and pre&alence in society. )n actuality there are no de&ices or methods able to consistently pro&ide access to the phase state. 1t best these e#ist in a largely supplementary capacity and the more a practitioner is able to do on his or her o(n the more helpful and effecti&e these supplements are. )f phase entry has not been mastered autonomously then results through the use of supplements (ill be totally accidental. The reason behind the (eak effecti&eness of non"autonomous methods of phase entrance rests in the fact that the physiological process responsible for the phase e#perience cannot be e#actly defined. Only generalities are kno(n nothing else. )n order to gain a clear understanding of the state the processes that gi&e rise to it must be discerned and analy=ed. 1ll e#isting technologies ha&e either blundered do(n a clearly mistaken path Fsynchroni=ing the hemispheres of the brainG or tra&elled to(ard the detection and use of indirect indicators Fcueing technologiesG.

C4EING #EC7NO;OGIES Of all non"autonomous assistance methods cueing technologies yield the best results. The operating principle behind cueing technologies is 2uite simple- a de&ice detects rapid eye mo&ement FREMG and sends signals to a sleeping practitioner prompting dream consciousness or an a(akening that may be follo(ed by indirect techni2ues. ,ueing programs or de&ices may also send indicators o&er specific inter&als of timeJ these are recei&ed during REM sleep and are meant to cause a sleeping practitioner to a(aken and attempt indirect techni2ues. More sophisticated REM"detecting technologies may be purchased at speciali=ed stores or through online merchandisers. REM"detecting technologies (ork by &irtue of special night mask e2uipped (ith a motion sensor that detects the fre2uency of specific eye mo&ements that occur during REM sleep. .hen the eye mo&ements reach REM 2uality the de&ice sends discreet signals to the practitioner through light sound &ibrations or a combination of these. )n turn the practitioner must discern the signal and react to it (hile sleeping (ith the goal of phase entry through dream consciousness. The effecti&eness of REM"detecting de&ices is more plausible in theory than in practice. The mind 2uickly de&elops a tolerance for these types of e#ternal stimuli and stops reacting and as a result such technologies are hardly used more than one or t(o nights per (eek. 4econdly a practitioner (ill detect only a small portion of the signals and conscious reaction occurs in e&en smaller instances. ,ueing technologies are best used to send signals that allo( a practitioner to a(aken (ithout mo&ing during REM sleep (hich facilitates a high probability of phase entrance through indirect techni2ues. Pricing of these !mind"machines$ Fthe common moniker of any de&ice that purports to produce altered consciousnessG (idely &aries and is determined by 2uality of REM detection and signaling. 1&ailable models include7ream4talker 7reamMaker F'o&a7reamerG REM"7reamer 1stral ,atapult among many

others. 4ince the use of these de&ices does not guarantee increased success in practice in&esting money in the technology is not recommended. )f a practitioner is curious about cueing technologies similar de&ices may be constructed at home using a special computer program and a run"of"the"mill optical mouse. 7esigns for a homegro(n setup are easily located on the )nternet. 1nother do"it"yourself (ay of e#perimenting (ith cueing is through the use of a computer a music player or e&en the alarm clock function on a mobile phone. The practitioner sa&es short sounds or phrases played as an alarm e&ery 1; to 8A minutes (hile sleeping. These sounds (ill signal the practitioner to (ake up and attempt indirect techni2ues. )f the practitioner decides to use cueing technology se&eral fundamental principles should be considered as results (ill be less likely if they are ignored. First mind"machines should be used no more than t(ice a (eek. Other(ise too high a tolerance (ill be built up rendering the machines ineffecti&e. 4econd use cueing technology in combination (ith the deferred method (hich (as co&ered in the section on indirect techni2ues. )t is better to sleep for si# hours (ithout distraction and then after sleep has been interrupted put on a sleep"mask or earpiece and continue sleeping. 4leep (ill be light for the remaining t(o to four hours as there (ill be more REM sleep making it easier for the mind to detect cueing signals. Finally master indirect techni2ues before making use of cueing technologies to attain dream consciousness and subse2uent phase entrance. (O9=ING IN P3I9S .orking in pairs is considered the second most effecti&e non" autonomous methods of entering the phase. One practitioner is to be the acti&e one and the other fills the role of helper. The acti&e one practitioner attempts to enter the phase (hile the helper pro&ides &arious types of support to this end. For e#ample the acti&e practitioner lies do(n in bed (hile the helper stays nearby (aiting for the acti&e one to fall asleep. .hen

sleep occurs the helper obser&es the eyes of the acti&e (atching for the signs of REM sleep (hich is mainly characteri=ed by 2uick eye mo&ements. .hen REM is apparent the helper (hispers to the sleeper communicating that e&erything the practitioner is e#periencing is a dream. The helper may &ary the &olume of the (hisper use touch to strengthen the signal or shine a flashlight on the sleeperDs eyelids I (hich is &ery effecti&e. The acti&e practitioner should detect the signals (ithout (aking and indicate a state of conscious a(areness by performing 2uick cyclical eye mo&ements. )f no such indication is gi&en the helper continues to rouse the acti&e practitioner (ho may finally (ake. )f the acti&e practitioner is unable to stay in the dream indirect techni2ues should be performed. The acti&e practitioner should under no circumstances mo&e upon a(akening or (aste &aluable seconds before transitioning to indirect attempts. )f phase entrance does not occur after e#ercising the techni2ues the practitioner should again fall asleep (ith the intention of making another attempt. 3enerally se&eral such attempts are enough to glean results. .orking in pairs is best performed %ust prior to a daytime nap or (ith the same deferred method used for indirect techni2ues " an early"morning interruption of a practitionerDs nighttime sleep. #EC7NO;OGIES /O9 IND4CING #7E P73SE The ambition to create a de&ice facilitates 2uick and easy phase entrance has led to the appearance of assorted technologies that claim to fulfill such a role. 1s already stated none of these de&ices has been pro&en effecti&e. The most famous of these is the 6emi"4ync system (hich purports to synchroni=e the t(o hemispheres of the brain. 6emi"4ync (as de&eloped by Robert Monroe an 1merican esotericism e#pert researcher. The idea behind 6emi"4ync is that out"of"body sensations may be induced by achie&ing synchroni=ation of the brainDs t(o hemispheres. 6o(e&er this type of approach yields a parado# for the lack of scientific For pseudo"scientificG e&idence that hemispheric synchroni=ation influences sensory perception. 1ctually it is the

cerebral corte# and constituents that are primarily responsible for sensory perception. 1t the beginning of the +Ath century it became clear that the key roles in sensory processes are played by &arying le&els of inhibition and acti&ity in the cerebral corte# and almost not else(here. The key to sol&ing the problem of technologically induced phase entrance rests in the inhibition processes of the cerebral corte#. 4ynchroni=ation de&ices ha&e no effect on the operation of the cerebral corte#. The idea of using sounds of &arious fre2uencies to induce a specific le&el of electrical acti&ity in the brain is so far considered impossible. Thus the sounds and noises used to assist separation from the body cannot directly affect the process but merely ser&e as cueing signals. 4uch a system (orks only after ha&ing been used for a long time if it (orks at all. Moreo&er it might only (ork once or t(ice. 'e&ertheless synchroni=ation systems are able to help practitioners reach a free floating state of consciousness since the systems pre&ent sleep or induce (akefulness pro&iding fertile ground for direct phase entry. 6o(e&er the systems ha&e nothing at all to do (ith synchroni=ing the t(o hemispheres of the brain. The idea of inducing &arious phase states through sound has gained (ide attention. Many other programs and technologies ha&e appeared as a result including for e#ample the 5rain .a&e 3enerator F5.3G (hich allo(s the practitioner to independently e#periment (ith a (ide array of sounds and fre2uencies and &arious methods of transmission. The effect is the same- cueing during sleep or the maintenance of a transitional state. Thus there is no noticeable difference bet(een using machines and listening to similar sounds or musical compositions. )nasmuch as the de&ices described abo&e ha&e not deli&ered notable result the search for ne( technologies continues unhindered. The number of ideas to e#ert nonin&asi&e influence o&er the brain and its constituent parts is increasing. For e#ample there is a theory that phase e#periences may be induced by electromagnetically stimulating the left angular gyrus. 6o(e&er this like all other non" autonomous methods is strictly based on theory. 1t present

consistent focused unassisted practice is the simplest and only guaranteed means to achie&ing phase entrance. 78PNOSIS 3ND S4GGES#ION 6ypnosis is a little"studied method of entering the phase. The idea is that a hypnotist is able to cause a person to enter the phase through suggestion or affirmation. There is no doubt that hypnosis is an interesting concept especially for persons (ho easily yield to po(er of suggestion but such indi&iduals account for only 1K of the population. 7ue to specific characteristics of human perception the chances are nil that hypnosis is a likely conduit to phase entrance. 4o it seems unlikely that hypnotic techni2ues (ill become (ell"kno(n or that a top"notch hypnotist (ould through suggestion easily be able to lead a sub%ect directly into the phase. 6o(e&er it is completely feasible that hypnotic suggestion may promote higher fre2uency in dream consciousness or a(akening (ithout mo&ing Fand remembering to do indirect techni2uesG. 6ere again this method is only a facilitator (hile actual phase entrance depends on the efforts of the practitioner. P78SIO;OGIC3; SIGN3;S The simplest (ay to supplement the practice is establishing a reminder that prompts conscious a(akening and subse2uent indirect techni2ues. This may be accomplished by blindfolding the eyes or tying a cord taut around an arm or leg. The idea is that the reminder is immediately felt (hen the practitioner (akes prompting the attempt of indirect techni2ues. )n actuality mind"machines (ork using the same principle since these are most effecti&e as cues that arouse an intention to perform a specific action. 1 more sophisticated e#ample of a reminder is (hen a practitioner do=es off in a position meant to cause numbness to a certain body part. .hile a(akening the practitioner (ill take the physical numbness a cue to practice indirect techni2ues. 1 secondary

benefit to this method of physiological signaling is that the numb body part may easily be used to perform phantom (iggling. Falling asleep (hile lying on the back (ith an arm behind the head or by lying directly on an arm are effecti&e e#amples. These and other postures (ill impede circulation cause numbness and promote a(akening. 'aturally the numbness should not be e#cessi&e. 7i&erse e#periments that e#ploit physiological needs are especially popular for inducing conscious a(akening or becoming conscious (hile dreaming. For e#ample a practitioner may forgo (ater o&er the course of the day before attempting to enter the phase. The effect is an acute thirst (hile dreaming (hich may be used to communicate that the dream state has taken o&er. Or thirst causes repeated a(akenings during (hich the practice of indirect techni2ues may commence. 1n alternati&e to depri&ing the body of (ater is including more salt in foods consumed before going to sleep. 1nother method is to drink a lot of (ater before sleep causing the practitioner to a(aken naturally producing an opportunity to perform indirect techni2ues. Using this has been kno(n to result in dream consciousness. 1nother popular method helps (ith direct techni2ues. )t (orks by falling asleep (hile keeping the forearm propped up at the elbo(. .hen the practitioner falls asleep the forearm falls to the bed as the body shuts do(n. Feeling the arm fall signals a lapse of consciousness after (hich direct techni2ues may be attempted. )f this method fails to produce results on the first try it may be repeated by raising the forearm before falling asleep. This method helps some but rarely on the first try. )t should not be counted as panacea. 0ike all other non"autonomous methods practicing phase entrance using physiological signals should not be done on a regular basis. There are more pleasant autonomous techni2ues that only re2uire a natural (illpo(er and healthy desire. C7EMIC3; S4BS#3NCES 4ince the beginning the history of ad&ances in phase entrance methodologies has included a direct link to the use of consumable

supplements starting (ith plants and mushrooms in ancient times. The use of speciali=ed herbs mushrooms and cacti is still practiced in isolated culturesJ 4iberian shamans and 'orth 1merican )ndians for e#ample. 1mid the hunger for altered states of a(areness these chemical supplements ha&e reached e&ery corner of the de&eloped (orld. 6o(e&er the proliferation of these substances has caused a marked degradation in the progress of modern phase practice. The names and descriptions of these &arious chemical concoctions herbs and plants included are not (orthy of inclusion in this te#t. They are officially considered illegal in some countries (hile still a&ailable in the pharmacies of othersJ ne&ertheless they are all dangerous. There are t(o primary problems (ith using such supplements. First practicing the phase through the consumption of chemical substances and &arious herbal supplements is not a path to de&elopment but to ruin. 7rug abuse and personal de&elopment are polar opposites in no (ay compatible. ,heap thrills are consistently follo(ed by chemical dependencies and health problems. 4econd although a user may e#perience phase sensations under the influence of such substances the 2uality of e#perience is completely different. )t is not only the stability or depth of phase that are affected by these supplements but a userDs consciousness and a(areness. The use of substances and the resultant alteration of mental processes negati&ely impact self"a(areness. The phase must be accompanied by t(o things- phase sensations and a complete conscious a(areness. )f one of these is missing then the state e#perienced by definition is not the phase. .hen descriptions of these chemically !enhanced$ e#periences are studied the hallmark of e&ery one is a complete lack of control. Using any type of chemical or herbal substance to reach the phase must be ruled out. 4ummarily these make it impossible to e#perience the phase and ultimately destroy physical and mental health. #7E /4#49E O/ NON-34#ONOMO4S ME#7ODS /O9 EN#E9ING #7E P73SE

E&en though no beneficial non"autonomous technologies currently e#ist the future is (ide open before them. .ith the de&elopment of effecti&e technologies the phase (ill cease as the e#clusi&e domain of the initiated and become a (idespread practice. Only then (ill the Fsometimes %ustifiedG stereotypes and pre%udices connected to the mystical nature of the phenomenon be dispelled and only then (ill the phase gain the necessary attention from researchers needed to ably de&elop the science of phase practice. .hen e#ternally applied methods that cause phase entrance are disco&ered the human e#perience (ill drastically change. These technologies for inducing and monitoring phase e#periences (ill open up incredible possibilities. For e#ample it (ill be possible to participate in a mo&ie instead of %ust (atchingJ people (ill be able to try and e&aluate products (ithout lea&ing homeJ tra&el throughout designed (orlds (ill take placeJ computer games (ill be substituted (ith analogous e#periences including real physical sensations. The ultimate step (ould be the unification of phase e#periences into a collecti&e parallel (orld integrated to e#istent digital net(orks- the Matri# Fthe MindnetG. Using this Matri# it (ill be possible to communicate (ith someone on the other side of the planet " not %ust through a broadband &ideo link but literally tCte D tCte. This &ision of the future is a drop in the ocean of possibilities that (ill open (ith phase entrance technologies. The first step to(ard the future is a thorough pragmatic and correct application of the techni2ues no( a&ailable. #8PIC3; MIS#3=ES (I#7 NON-34#ONOMO4S #EC7NI<4ES The belief that de&ices are able to phase entrance if autonomous techni2ues fail e&en though it is much easier to enter the phase through strictly indi&idual efforts. .asting a large amount of time and effort on &arious technologies to create a phase state. 'o such technology e#ists.

 Using cueing technologies on a daily basis e&en though they arenDt supposed to be used more than t(ice a (eek. Using cueing technologies all night long (hen it is much better to use these in con%unction (ith the deferred method. Using cueing technologies (ithout affirming a personal intention of appropriate reaction to the signals- this is crucial to cue effecti&eness. .orking in pairs during the first hours of nighttime sleep e&en though REM sleep occurs infre2uently and then for only short periods of time. .hile (orking in pairs the helper gi&ing an acti&e practitioner too strong a signal. 4ignals should be kept discreet to pre&ent (aking the sleeper. Employing an amateur hypnotist to increase the fre2uency of dream consciousness. The use of hypnotic suggestion to a practitioner (ho is not susceptible to hypnosis. Using physiological signals on a daily basis causing physical discomfort &ersus getting en%oyment out of the practice. The belief chemical substances promote dissociati&e e#periences. 1cting on this belief is e2ui&alent to drug abuse.

E*er ises for Chapter )

<uestions 1. 1re techni2ues based on breathing be considered non" autonomous methods of entering the phase/ +. .hich non"autonomous and non"chemical means allo( phase entrance after the first attempts/ 8. .hy is it still not possible to create a de&ice that causes phase entry/ :. 1re cueing technologies beneficial to o&ercoming difficulties (ith conscious a(akening/

;. .hat happens if a practitioner uses cueing technologies for se&en days in a ro(/ <. ,an cueing technologies make use of light signals/ >. ,an feasting on peanuts before sleep help the process of phase entry/ ?. .ill putting a tight rubber band around an ankle promote phase entry/ @. .hile (orking in a pair are both practitioners re2uired to enter the phase/ 1A. ,an the helper be compared to a cueing de&ice (hile (orking in a pair/ 11. .hen should the helper gi&e the signal that the acti&e practitioner is dreaming/ 1+. .ould a hypnotist making suggestions about entering the phase be helpful to e&ery practitioner/ 18. .hy do phase"inducing technologies sometimes (ork e&en though these are based on fla(ed theories/ 1:. .hat is absent in a phase induced by chemical substances/ #as!s 1. Try using a cueing de&ice se&eral times in con%unction (ith the deferred method. ,reate a short sound file and set it to a de&ice that plays the file bet(een 1;"minute inter&als of silence. +. 5efore going to sleep at night try the raised forearm method of entering the phase se&eral times. 1ttempt this using the deferred method. 8. )f you ha&e the opportunity try to achie&e entry into the phase by (orking in pairs.

Part II Managing the Out-of-Body E*perien e

Chapter + - Deepening
#7E CONCEP# O/ DEEPENING 3eepening refers to techni4ues that induce realistic perception and a&areness in the phase state( The phase is not an e#act fi#ed state (here a practitioner is present or not. )t is a realm of states characteri=ed by a transition from the usual perception of the physical body to a complete alienation from it (hile maintaining consciousness and reality of perception albeit in a different frame of space. The transition begins (ith perception of the natural physical body follo(ed by a moment of ambiguity (here a clear e#perience of body is intermingled (ith a sense of the percei&ed body. 1fter(ard the percei&ed body enters the phase space (hile the physical body becomes a memory. 1t this point the percei&ed senses may be 2uite dullJ for e#ample &ision may be blurred or completely absent. 7eepening techni2ues sol&e the problem of diminished or absent sensory perception in the phase. 4ensory e#periences (ithin a fully reali=ed phase e#perience are as realistic as those in e&eryday reality. )n almost one"half of all cases practitioners obser&e that reality"based surroundings pale in comparison to &ibrant detail and color of the phase space. To this end after entering the phase a practitioner must perform deepening techni2ues to enhance and solidify the degree and 2uality of phase reality.

Full spatial perception in the phase only occurs after deepening techni2ues ha&e been applied. There (ould be no point to remaining in the phase (ithout deepening. For e#ample (hat is the point in finding a person in phase if it is not e&en possible to discern his or her eyes there/ -n a considera"le nu$"er of cases, deepening is not necessary, since the phase e#perience is co$pletely realistic, if not hyperrealistic( -n cases li+e these, deepening $ay "e "ypassed( 7eepening is also related to the length of time a practitioner may remain in the phase. )f an action is taken (ithout a deep realistic phase the e#perience (ill al(ays be se&eral times shorter in duration than a phase (here deepening techni2ues had been applied. The properties of the phase space &ery much depend on its depth. .hen surroundings are blurry and unclear the stability of ob%ects is &ery (eak. There is a direct correlation bet(een the realism of a phase and a practitionerDs le&el of a(areness so it is e#tremely important to ensure a deep phase in order to promote ma#imum a(areness.

Interesting Fact! The realis$ of a deep phase space is often so great that it causes uncontrolla"le fear or shoc+( 7eepening should only be performed follo(ing complete separation from the body. )f initiated before separation the phase may end prematurely. )f complete separation does not occur primary deepening should be used. 1s regards the deepening techni2ues themsel&es there is one main one and there are se&eral subsidiary ones. The main techni2ue (hich does not present any difficulties is sufficient for ha&ing a successful practice. Interesting Fact! -gnorance of deepening techni4ues has led to a great nu$"er of "aseless theories and superstitions( So$e practices treat differing phase depths as various states and even &orlds( -n reality, there are si$ple actions that ensure a singular phase e#perience(

P9IM398 DEEPENING #EC7NI<4ES The goal of primary deepening is to achie&e complete separation from the body allo(ing further actions (ithin the phase. Primary deepening entails achie&ing t(o principal ob%ecti&es- complete separation from the physical body and anchoring the percei&ed body (ithin the phase space. .hen separation from the body occurs through the use of a separation techni2ue a posture must be assumed that completely different from the posture of the real physical body. The greater the degree of postural similarity bet(een the physical and percei&ed bodies the more shallo( and brief the phase (ill be. For e#ample in the case of hori=ontal le&itation a 1?A turn must immediately performed arms and legs spread adopting a &ertical posture. Under no circumstances should a practitioner in the phase remain in a posture identical to that of the physical body. )f a practitioner is pulled back to(ard the body after separation anchoring should be initiated that facilitates standing or sitting in the phase. Resisting the gra&ity of the physical body is paramount to remaining in the phase. The result of (illful resistance is directly proportional to the degree of applied effort. )t (ill help to grab hold of surrounding ob%ects and hold on to themJ any means of anchoring the percei&ed body (ithin the phase are appropriate. )t is possible to start rotating around an a#isJ not simply imagining the rotation but performing it (ith the percei&ed body as (ell. DEEPENING #79O4G7 SENSO98 3MP;I/IC3#ION The more a phase is e#perienced by the sensory faculties the deeper and longer the phase (ill be. 4ensory amplification in the phase is the most effecti&e deepening techni2ue precisely because it allo(s the acti&ation of primary internal sensations during the transition from reality to the phase. There are se&eral (ays to perform sensory amplification.

Ealpation is the first deepening techni2ue that should be recalled (hen entering the phase. 9ision may be absent at the beginning of a phase e#perience but the sensation of occupying a defined space is almost al(ays present. )n the case of a completely absent sense of sight only tactile" kinesthetic perception is possible. That is mo&ement throughout a space and the touching ob%ects there is the only option (hen &ision is absent. The sense of touch plays a key role in the perception of e&eryday reality. 1ccordingly if the sense of touch is acti&ely used in the phase space it is only natural that the phase (ill deepen and reach its ma#imum potential. Palpation is performed by fleetingly touching anything that may be found in the immediate surroundings. This should be done by 2uickly but carefully percei&ing the feel of surfaces and shapes. 6ands should not remain on a particular place for more than one second remaining constantly in motion to locate ne( ob%ects. The goal of palpation is to touch and also to learn something about encountered ob%ects or shapes. For e#ample if one feels a mug one may touch it not only from the outside but also from the inside. Once a practitioner has rolled out of the body the bed may be touchedJ the physical body lying in bed may be touched as (ell as the floor the carpet nearby (alls or a bedside table. 1nother palpation techni2ue is performed by rubbing the palms against each other as if trying to (arm them on a cold day. 5lo(ing on the palms also produces sensations that (ill help deepen the phase. 4ince tactile perception of the (orld is not limited to the palms the hands should be mo&ed o&er the entire body (hile in the phase to e#cite and fully acti&ate the sense of touch. 1s soon as palpation begins the feeling that the phase is deepening and becoming fi#ed soon follo(s. Usually it takes fi&e to 1A seconds of palpation e#ercises to reach the ma#imum le&el of deepening. 1fter performing this techni2ue the pseudo"physical sensations (ill be indistinguishable from those of e&eryday reality. )f &ision is absent on phase entry it 2uickly emerges during palpation.

Eeering is the primary technical &ariation of sensory amplification. 6o(e&er it is not al(ays initially accessible since it re2uires &ision (hich may begin as absent in the phase. Once &ision appears or has been created using special techni2ues Fsee ,hapter ?G peering may begin. The effecti&eness of this techni2ue originates in the fact that &ision is the humanDs primary instrument of perception. Therefore by e#citing &ision to its ma#imum potential (ithin the phase it is possible to attain a fully immersi&e phase state that is completely apart from normal reality. Peering should be done at a distance of four to si# inches from ob%ects (ithin the phase. 1 practitioner should glance o&er the minute details of ob%ects and surfaces to bring definition to the phase space (hile increasing the 2uality of &ision. .hen looking at hands the lines of the palm or the fingernail and cuticles should be e#amined. )f obser&ing a (all study the te#ture of its (allpaper. .hen looking at a mug one should look carefully at its handle the cur&e of its rim or any inscriptions. 1ttention should not remain on one area of an ob%ect for more than half a second. 1cti&e obser&ation should constantly mo&e to ne( ob%ects and their minute details approaching ob%ects or picking them up to dra( them nearer. )tDs best (hen ob%ects near one anotherJ other(ise too much time is spent mo&ing around. Peering brings 2uick and clear results. Usually if &ision is blurry and there is a yearning to return into the physical body (ith %ust 8"1A seconds of peering all of this (ill be gone (ithout a trace. 1fter peering &ision ad%usts as 2uickly and clearly as if a camera lens (as correctly installed in front of the eyes capturing the image in the sharpest of focus. Si$ultaneous peering and palpation pro&ide the ma#imum possible deepening effect in the phase. This method of sensory amplification engages the t(o most important percepti&e thus the effect is t(ice greater than (hen the t(o actions are separately performed. )f &ision is present in the phase simultaneous peering and palpation is an absolute necessity because it facilitates good phase depth in the 2uickest and simplest manner.

The combination of palpation and peering must not only be performed simultaneously but also upon the same ob%ects. For e#ample (hile a practitioner may look at the hands and simultaneously rub them against each otherJ or (hile looking at a coffee mug all of its parts may be obser&ed and touched at the same. )t is necessary to maintain dynamism of action remembering that feelings should be e#perienced not half"heartedly remembering that full concentration on sensory amplification is an e#cellent means to a deep 2uality phase. SECOND398 DEEPENING #EC7NI<4ES Di>ing 7eadfirst 7i&ing headfirst is used if sensory amplification techni2ues do not (ork or (hen the practitioner in the phase is located in an undefined space (here there is nothing to touch or look at. This techni2ue (orks thanks to the unusual &estibular sensations that it causes (hich help to enhance perception. This techni2ue is performed (ith the eyes shut if &ision is a&ailable and the practitioner literally di&es headfirst into the floor or space at the feet. 1 feeling of mo&ement a(ay from the physical body (ill immediately arise during the flight do(n and the di&e itself (ill be e#perienced as if it is really happening. 4imultaneously the surrounding space may darken and become colder. 1gitation or fear may also appear. 1fter fi&e to 1; seconds of flight the practitioner is either arri&es in an undetermined place in the phase or hits a dead end like a (all. )n the case of a dead end a translocation techni2ue should be used. Translocation may also be attempted if deepening does not occur during the flight if sense perception stops impro&ing or if a good degree of realism has already been achie&ed. 1n alternati&e to the translocation techni2ue- hold the hands about four to si# inches in front of the face and try to obser&e them (ithout opening the eyesJ this (ill mo&e the practitioner to another random location. .hen falling headfirst do not think about the floorJ assume that it (ill be penetrated. This &ery effecti&e if the phase has not reached a fullness of depth.

1 desire to not simply fall do(n obser&ing oneDs perceptions but instead race s(iftly do(n(ard (hile trying to mo&e a(ay from the body is e#tremely important. )n case of failure to do so instead of deepening such a fall may lead to a return to the state of being a(ake i.e. to a foul. ?i0ration 0ike falling headfirst the &ibration techni2ue should be used if sensory amplification techni2ues do not (ork or (hen the practitioner in the phase is located in an undefined space (here there is nothing to touch or look at. 1fter separating from the body it is normally 2uite easy to create &ibrations by thinking about them by straining the brain or by straining the body (ithout using muscles. The occurrence of &ibrations pro&ides a significant opportunity to deepen the phase. 1n ad&antage of this techni2ue is that it does not re2uire any preliminary actions and thus may be practiced at any moment. The brain is strained to the ma#imum e#tent possible (hich cause &ibrations that may be intensified and managed through spasmodic or prolonged straining. )f this techni2ue does not produce deepening after fi&e to 1A seconds the techni2ue has to be changed or action should be taken at the practitionerDs current depth in the phase. 3ggressi>e 3 tion This techni2ue may be used as an alternati&e to any other deepening techni2ue since it can be used at any moment. Practicing this techni2ue only re2uires aggressi&e action of the percei&ed body. 1 practitioner may run roll on the floor perform gymnastics or mo&e the arms and legs. Ma#imum acti&ity and aggression are paramount to the successful use of this techni2ue. )f the practitioner is stuck in a dark space (a&ing the arms and legs from side to side is appropriate. )f the practitioner is in (ater s(imming (ith determined po(erful strokes (ould be suitable recourse. The type of action &ery much depends on the specific

situation along (ith an aggressi&e desire on the part of the practitioner. 1s a rule the effect of such mo&ements and relocations comes 2uite 2uickly especially if attention is focused on all the accompanying sensations. I'agining reality This interesting techni2ue should be used by e#perienced practitioners or if all other deepening techni2ues fail. 1 practitioner aggressi&ely imagines being located in the physical (orld e#periencing its intrinsic reality of perception and not in the phase. This should be done (hile in a state of separation from the body (ith a sense of &ision present. )f successful the surrounding phase space (ill immediately brighten and sensory perception of the phase (ill e#ceed the normal e#perience of reality. )f this techni2ue produces no clear results after a fe( seconds another techni2ue should be used. GENE93; 3C#I?I#8 1ll deepening techni2ues should be practiced (ith a high le&el of aggression (ith no pauses only continuous deliberate action. )f techni2ues are practiced in a calm rela#ed manner then deepening attempts (ill most often result in falling asleep or returning to the body. #8PIC3; MIS#3=ES D49ING DEEPENING Forgetting to perform deepening techni2ues (hen necessary. ,arrying out unnecessary deepening (hile at a sufficient depth. 6alting deepening techni2ues before reaching ma#imum realism in the phase. ,arrying out main deepening techni2ues prior to ha&ing become completely separated from the body although at this time only primary deepening should be used.

 ,ontinuing deepening techni2ues (hen results ha&e already been achie&ed. 1lternating too 2uickly bet(een deepening techni2ues instead of concentrating on each of them for at least fi&e to 1A seconds. Performing the techni2ues slo(ly and calmly instead of aggressi&ely. 1pplying techni2ues of sensory amplification (hile stuck in a shapeless dark space (hen these should only be performed in a &i&id and realistic place. Obser&ing ob%ects located too far from the eyes during &isual sensori=ation instead of the re2uired four to fi&e inches. .hen peering scrutini=ing a single detail of an ob%ect for too long (hen it is necessary to 2uickly s(itch from one detail to another. Taking in a (hole ob%ect (hen peering (hile only parts of it should be obser&ed. ,oncentrating too long on the details of a single ob%ect instead of focusing on different ob%ects in 2uick succession. 0ong palpation of a single ob%ect during sensory amplification instead of rapidly s(itching from one ob%ect to another. 7eepening (hile standing in place (hen it is important to maintain constant motion. Falling headfirst (ith the eyes open although the eyes must be shut to a&oid crashing into the floor. Falling headfirst (ithout the desire or intention of falling far and 2uickly. Forgetting to use translocation techni2ues after hitting a dead end. Forgetting to alternate deepening techni2ues if some of them are not (orking. Fear of the hyperrealism of the e#perience and halting deepening instead of calmly continuing (ith the techni2ue.

E*er ises for Chapter +

<uestions 1. 1fter (hich phase entrance techni2ues is deepening necessary/ +. .hy is phase deepening necessary/ 8. 1re there cases (here phase deepening is unnecessary/ :. .hat le&el of reality should be achie&ed by deepening/ ;. .hen should deepening begin after entering the phase/ <. 7oes deepening influence the length of a phase e#perience/ >. .hy is primary deepening necessary/ ?. May one touch oneDs head (hen the performing sensori=ation of feelings/ @. 4hould a practitioner look at curtains (hile peering/ 1A. )s it effecti&e to apply peering at phase ob%ects from a distance of 1 to 1.; yards/ 11. ,an peering be used during palpation/ 1+. .hen should the eyes be closed (hile falling headfirst/ 18. .ould thro(ing punches like a bo#er help a practitioner to deepen/ 1:. 6o( calmly should the deepening techni2ues be performed/ #as!s 1. 7e&ote the ne#t three successful phases to perfecting deepening techni2ues using all of the methods described in this chapter. +. Using personal e#perience try %udging (hich techni2ue suits you best from personal e#perience.

Chapter , - Maintaining
#7E GENE93; CONCEP# O/ M3IN#3INING Ehase $aintenance or >$aintaining? refers to techni4ues that allo& a practitioner to re$ain in the phase for the $a#i$u$ a$ount of ti$e possi"le( .ithout kno(ledge of !maintaining$ techni2ues the duration of the phase (ill be se&eral times shorter than it could other(ise be. The shortest phases last %ust a fe( seconds. 5eginning practitioners usually fear not being able to e#it a phaseJ this shouldnDt e&er be a concern because the real challenge is being able to maintain the phase state (hich is easily lost unless phase maintenance techni2ues are used.

Phase maintenance consists of three primary principles- resisting a return to the (akeful state Fkno(n as a foulG resisting falling asleep

and resisting a false e#it from the phase. 1s a rule the first t(o problems Freturn to a (akeful state or falling asleepG are often encountered by beginners but the third difficulty Ffalse e#itG manifests at later stages of practice. Resistance to returning to the body is self"e#planatory (hereas resistance to falling asleep is unclear to many. 'ot e&eryone kno(s that almost half of phase e#periences usually end in a 2uite tri&ial (ay " falling asleep. 1 person usually looses attenti&eness his or her a(areness dissipates and e&erything around gradually looses clarity and turns into (hat is for all intents and purposes a usual dream. Resisting a false e#it from the phase is a lot more surprising and dramatic. 4ometimes a practitioner detects an impending e#it from the phase subse2uent deepening techni2ues fail to (ork resulting in (hat seems to be a return to the body and physical reality. 4ure that the phase has ended a practitioner may stand up and the fall asleep after percei&ing a fe( steps. )n such cases falling asleep most often happens (ithout any mo&ement but (hile still lying in bed. The problem is that the difference bet(een the phase and reality can be so subtle that in terms of internal or e#ternal indicators the phase practically canDt be distinguished from reality. Therefore one must kno( the necessary actions to take in the e&ent that the phase ceases since the end of a phase could actually be a trick and purely imagined. There are specific solutions for the three problems described in addition to general rules that apply to any phase e#perience. 4tudying these rules should be gi&en %ust as high a priority as studying the specific solutions since only some of them (hen applied separately may help one to remain in the phase se&eral times longer than usual. )n some cases techni2ues for maintaining are not applicable. 6o(e&er kno(ledge of ho( to maintain is useful for the ma%ority of e#periences. 1lso there might be situations (hen someone need only resist a foul (hile someone else may need to resist falling asleep. 1ll of this is &ery specific to each case and can be determined only in practice. .ith perfect kno(ledge of all the techni2ues for maintaining a phase may last t(o to four minutes (hich doesnDt sound like an

e#tended duration but really is. 1 particularity of the phase space is that achie&ing something and mo&ing around in it takes a minimum amount of time mere seconds. Thus so much can be done during 8 minutes in the phase that one literally needs a list so as not to (aste any time. There are theories that ha&e neither been pro&en nor dispro&en claiming that time in the phase contracts and e#pands relati&e to real time. Thus one minute of real time (hile in the phase may feel much longer in terms of phase time. Perception of time &aries from practitioner to practitioner. 'o&ices especially percei&e a real minute as more like fi&e to 1A minutes in the phase. This is determined by the particularities of indi&idual psychology state of mind and the type of e&ents that occur in the phase. )n order to understand ho( long a phase really lasted one does not need to try using a stop(atch in the real (orld. )t is better to count ho( many actions took place in it and ho( much time each of them could ha&e taken. The result (ill differ from oneDs first rough estimate se&eral times o&er. The ma#imum duration the phase &aries depends hea&ily on the ability to apply phase maintenance techni2ues. 4ome practitioners ha&e difficulty breaking the t(o"minute barrier (hile some find it easy to remain in the phase for 1A minutes or longer. )t is physically impossible to remain in the phase fore&er because e&en a +A"minute phase is unheard of. #EC7NI<4ES 3ND 94;ES 3G3INS# 9E#49NING #O #7E BOD8 Of the follo(ing techni2ues constant sensory amplification and as"needed sensory amplification are applied the most often (hile performing phase maintenance. 6o(e&er as opposed to other technical elements of phase e#ploration other secondary techni2ues of maintaining often become mainstream and the most appropriate for certain indi&iduals. Thus all the techni2ues should be studied but the first t(o should be considered &ery carefully.

Constant Sensory 3'plifi ation The same sensory amplification described in the chapter on deepening F,hapter <G also applies to !maintaining$. )n essence ha&ing achie&ed the necessary depth of phase one should not stop to acti&ely agitate his or her perception but should keep on doing this all the (hile albeit not as acti&ely as during deepening. The idea is that during the entire duration of the phase all action should be focused on e#periencing the ma#imum possible amount of tactile"kinesthetic and &isual perceptions. This entails constantly touching and e#amining e&erything in minute detail. For e#ample if passing by a bookcase touch and e#amine some of the books in it including their pages and corners. Tactile obser&ation should be performed on e&ery encountered ob%ect. Palpation may be applied separately as a background sensation. This is done in order not to o&erload the sense of sight. The hands should be touching something all the time or better still rubbing each other. 3s-Needed Sensory 3'plifi ation 1pplying the as"needed sensory amplification techni2ue is no different than constant sensory amplification. )t is used only (hen a foul Fa return to a (akeful stateG is imminent or (hen phase &ision starts to blur and fade. For e#ample (hile tra&eling in the phase e&erything may start to blur signaling a (eakening of the phase. 1t this moment the practitioner should touch e&ery a&ailable ob%ectJ obser&e e&erything in fine detail. 1s soon as returns to a clear and realistic state actions may be continued (ithout needing to perform amplification. Constant ?i0ration This techni2ue is used to maintain constant strong &ibrations in the phase. 1s pre&iously noted &ibrations are generated by straining the brain or tensing the body (ithout using muscles. Maintaining strong &ibrations (ill ha&e a positi&e effect on the length of the phase.

Strengthening ?i0rations as Needed )n this case &ibrations are created and strengthened only if signs of a foul become apparent. E#amples of foul indicators include duality of perception or blurred &ision. 4trengthening &ibrations (ill help to deepen the phase allo(ing a practitioner to stay and continue (ithin the phase. Di>ing 7eadfirst This techni2ue is the same as the deepening techni2ue of the same name. )f a phase is about to dissol&e di&ing headfirst (ith the eyes shut and a desire to di&e as 2uickly and deeply as possible. 1s soon as phase depth returns translocation techni2ues may be used to keep from arri&ing at a dead end. /or ed /alling 3sleep 1s soon as indicators of a foul appear immediately lie do(n on the floor and attempt forced falling asleepJ the same as the phase entry techni2ue. 1fter successfully performing the techni2ue F8" 1Asec.G a practitioner may get up and continue to tra&el through the phase since the perception of reality and its depth (ill most likely be restored. Resist actually fall asleep. 9otation )f indicators of a foul appear the practitioner should start rotating around the head"to"feet a#is. Unlike the phase entry techni2ue of the same name the mo&ement does not ha&e to be imagined. This is an absolutely real rotation in the phase. 1fter se&eral re&olutions depth (ill be restored and actions may be continued. )f indicators of a foul persist rotation should continue until proper depth is achie&ed. Counting 7uring the entire phase count to as large a number possible " not %ust for the sake of counting but (ith a strong desire to reach the highest number possible. ,ounting may be performed silently or out loud.

This techni2ue (orks by creating a strong determination to remain in the phase by pro&iding a goal that re2uires action in the phase. ;istening in )f there are any background sounds similar to those heard (hile entering the phase " rumbling (histling ringing bu==ing or si==ling I these sounds may be used to prolong duration of the phase by aggressi&e attempts at listening in hearing the entire range of internal sounds. The forced listening in techni2ue may also be used for phase maintenance. 7oo!ing onto the phase 1nother interesting method of !maintaining$ is hooking onto the phase. )n the e&ent of an impending foul grab onto an ob%ect in the phase acti&ely palpate or s2uee=e it. E&en if a return to the body occurs during this techni2ue the hands (ill continue to hold the phase ob%ect and the physical hands (ill not be percei&ed. 5eginning (ith these phantom feelings in the hands separation from the body is possible. 1ny nearby ob%ect may be hooked- the leg of a chair a drinking glass a doorknob a stone or a stick. )f there is nothing to grab hold of clasp the hands together or bite do(n on a lip or the tongue. T(o rules apply to using the techni2ues that help to resist a phase e#it. First of all ne&er think that the phase might end and result in a return to the bodyJ thoughts like this are like programming that immediately send the practitioner to a (akened physical state. 4econdly do not think about the physical body. 7oing (ill also instantly return the practitioner to the body e&ery time.

#EC7NI<4ES 3ND 94;ES /O9 9ESIS#ING /3;;ING 3S;EEP Constant 4nderstanding of the Possi0ility of /alling 3sleep Most of the time falling asleep (hile in the phase can be o&ercome by a constant a(areness that sleep is possible and detrimental to a continued phase. 1 practitioner must al(ays consider the probability of falling asleep and actions must be carefully analy=ed to ensure that they are based on real desires and not on parado#ical notions (hich are common to dreams. Periodi 3nalysis of 36areness Periodically asking the 2uestion !1m ) dreaming/$ (hile in the phase helps appraise situations and the 2uality of the actions being performed at any moment. )f e&erything meets the standards of full phase a(areness actions may be continued. 1sked on a regular basis this 2uestion becomes habit automatically used (hile transitioning to the phase state. )f you keep asking this 2uestion regularly sooner or later it (ill arise automatically at the moment (hen you are actually transitioning into a dream. This (ill then help one to (ake up after (hich it is possible to continue to remain in a full"fledged phase.. The fre2uency of the 2uestion should be based on a practitionerDs ability to consistently remain in the phase. )f a phase usually lasts fi&e to 1A minutes or more it is not necessary to ask the 2uestion more than once e&ery + minutesJ other(ise this 2uestion has to be asked fre2uently literally once a minute or %ust a little less often. There is another important rule related to resisting falling asleepno practitioner should engage or participate in spontaneous e&ents occurring in the phase. E&ents that are not planned or deliberate lead to a high probability of being immersed in the side action (hich results in a loss of concentrated a(areness.

#EC7NI<4ES 3G3INS# 3N 4N9ECOGNIBED P73SE 4ince the techni2ues of testing the realness of the end of the phase are a little absurd and demand additional attention to actions they should only be used in those cases (hen they are indeed re2uired. Until then one should simply bear them in mind and use them only in moments of doubt. The same methods may be used to safely determine (hether or not the practitioner is in the phase (hen using techni2ues for entering it. 7yper- on entration 4ince the cessation of the phase e#perience may be simulated and no different in terms of perception from a real e#it differences bet(een the physical (orld and the phase (orld must be acti&ely discerned. )n other (ords a practitioner must kno( ho( to determine (hether a genuine phase e#it has occurred. 1t present only one e#periment is kno(n to guarantee an accurate result. The phase space cannot (ithstand prolonged close &isual attention to the minute details of ob%ects. .ithin se&eral seconds of acute e#amination shapes begin to distort ob%ects change color produce smoke melt or morph in other (ays. 1fter e#iting the phase look at a small ob%ect from a distance of four to si# inches and remain focused on it for 1A seconds. )f the ob%ect does not change a practitioner can be assured that the surroundings are reality. )f an ob%ect is someho( distorted or aske( a practitioner kno(s that the phase is intact. The simplest option is to look at the tip of the finger since it is al(ays close at hand. )t is also possible to take a book and e#amine its te#t. Te#t in the phase (ill either blur or appear as alphabetical gibberish or full of incomprehensible symbols. 3u*iliary te hni$ues There are a &ariety of other procedures to test the occurrence of a foul. 6o(e&er since any situation any property or any function can be simulated in the phase these procedures are not al(ays applicable.

For e#ample some suggest that it is sufficient to attempt doing something that is realistically impossible and if a practitioner is in the phase the impossible action (ill be possible. The problem (ith this suggestion is that the la(s of the physical (orld may be simulated in the phase so flying passing through (alls or telekinesis may not be possible e&en in the deepest phase. )t has also been suggested that looking at a clock t(ice in a ro( may help a practitioner determine (hether or not the phase is intactJ allegedly the clock (ill display a different time each time it is obser&ed. 6ere again the clockDs display may not change in the phase. Of all the au#iliary procedures one deser&es mention and (orks in the ma%ority of cases- searching for differences from reality in the surroundings. 1lthough the usual surroundings of a practitioner may be 1AAK accurately simulated in the phase it is &ery rare. Therefore it is possible to figure out (hether a phase is intact by carefully e#amining the room (here e&erything is taking place. )n the phase there (ill be something e#tra or something (ill be missingJ the time of day or e&en the season (ill be different from reality and so on. For e#ample (hen &erifying (hether a foul occurred a room may be missing the table supporting a tele&ision set or the table may be there but be a different color. GENE93; 94;ES /O9 M3IN#3INING The rules for maintaining the phase deal (ith resisting all or most of the problems (hich cause a phase to end. 4ome of these rules are capable of increasing the length of stay in the phase by many times and must be follo(ed. The practitioner should not loo+ into the distance( )f fara(ay ob%ects are obser&ed for a long period of time a foul may occur or one may be translocated to(ards these ob%ects. )n order to look at distant ob%ects (ithout problems a practitioner has to employ techni2ues for maintaining. For e#ample from time to time the practitioner should look at his hands rub them against each other or maintain strong &ibrations.

:onstant activity( Under no circumstances should a practitioner remain passi&e and calm in the phase. The more actions performed the longer the phase is. The fe(er actions I the shorter the phase. )t is enough to pause for thought and e&erything stops. Elan of action( There should be a clear plan of action consisting of at least ; tasks to be carried out in the phase at the earliest opportunity. This is necessary for se&eral important reasons. First the practitioner must not pause in the phase to think about !(hat to do ne#t$ (hich fre2uently results in a foul. 4econd ha&ing a plan the practitioner (ill subconsciously perform all of the actions necessary for staying in and maintaining the phase to carry out all the tasks that ha&e been planned. Third intelligent and pre"planned actions permit focused ad&ancement of purposeful actions &ersus (asting phase e#periences on (hate&er comes to mind at a gi&en moment. Fourth a plan of action creates necessary moti&ation and conse2uently pronounced intent to perform the techni2ues to enter the phase. Stopping the -3( The less )nternal 7ialogue F)7G and reflection that occurs in the phase the longer it lasts. 1ll thinking must be concentrated on (hat is being achie&ed and percei&ed. Talking to oneself is completely prohibited. The reason for this is that many thoughts may act as programming in the phase and e&en announcing them internally may introduce alterations including negati&e ones. For e#ample thinking about the body cause a return to it. The practitioner may also get lost in thought (hich (ill lead to a foul. 1lso sporadic thoughts usually and 2uite easily cause the practitioner to simply fall asleep. % practitioner $ust try to re-enter the phase after e#periencing a foul( 1l(ays remember that a typical phase e#perience consists of se&eral repeated entries and e#its. Essentially in most cases it is possible to re"enter the phase through the use of separation or phase state creation techni2ues immediately after returning to the body. )f the practitioner has %ust left the phase the brain is still close to it and appropriate techni2ues may be applied in order to continue the %ourney.

#8PIC3; MIS#3=ES (I#7 M3IN#3INING Forgetting to try to re"enter the phase after it is o&er although doing so greatly helps to increase number of e#periences had. 4taying focused on techni2ues for !maintaining$ instead of performing them as background tasks. 3etting distracted by e&ents and dropping phase maintenance techni2ues instead of continually performing (hatDs needed to maintain the phase. 4uccumbing to the idea that maintaining is not necessary (hen the phase appears &ery deep and stable e&en though these could be false sensations. Using the necessary techni2ues too late. 4topping due to uncertainty about further actions (hile there must al(ays be a plan. Forgetting that it is possible to fall asleep in the phase (ithout reali=ing it. Recogni=ing the risk of falling asleep must be a primary focus. 3etting pulled into e&ents occurring in the phase instead of obser&ing and controlling them from the outside. Forgetting that techni2ues for !maintaining$ must al(ays be used to remain in as deep a phase as possible and not %ust for maintaining any odd state. 4topping the use of techni2ues for !maintaining$ during contact (ith li&ing ob%ects (hen the techni2ues must be used constantly. ,ounting (ithout the desire to count as high as possible. Performing imagined rotation instead of real rotation. Passi&eness and calmness instead of constant acti&ity. E#cessi&e thinking and internal dialogue (hen these should be kept to an absolute minimum.

E*er ises for Chapter ,

<uestions 1. .hat is a foul/ +. .hat is the minimum duration of the phase/ 8. .hat do phase maintenance F!maintaining$G techni2ues counteract besides fouls and falling asleep/ :. .hy might a practitioner think that the phase has ended (hen it actually is still in progress/ ;. 4hould !maintaining$ techni2ues al(ays be used/ <. .hat primary techni2ues (ork against the occurrence of fouls/ >. 6o( can a practitioner hook onto the phase/ ?. .hile in the phase (hat do thoughts about the body lead to/ @. .hat 2uestion should be asked in the phase in order to reduce the probability of falling asleep/ 1A. .hat happens to an ob%ect during hyper"concentration/ 11. 6o( else apart from hyper"concentration might a practitioner effecti&ely recogni=e a false foul/ 1+. .hile in the phase is it permitted to look into the distance for a long time/ 18. .hat is )7 and ho( does the degree of it affect the duration of a phase e#perience/ 1:. .hat should a practitioner al(ays do after an inad&ertent return into the body/ #as!s 1. 7uring the ne#t fe( phases dedicate yourself to the single goal of maintaining as long as possible using as many maintaining techni2ues as you can. +. Figure out (hich techni2ues ha&e pro&en the most effecti&e and comfortable for you so that you may use these later. 8. )ncrease the duration of your a&erage phase to at least 8 minutes Fe&aluated ob%ecti&elyG.

Chapter - - Pri'ary s!ills

#7E ESSENCE O/ P9IM398 S=I;;S .hen dealing (ith a fully"reali=ed phase re2uisite kno(ledge is not limited to entry techni2ues deepening and maintenance of the state translocation or finding and interacting (ith ob%ects. )n order to feel comfortable a practitioner has to master or at least acclimate himself (ith a (hole series of techni2ues to correctly react in any number of situations. For e#ample a practitioner needs to kno( ho( to create &ision if it is absent. 1ctions including passage through a (all or taking flight in a deep phase do not happen easily although these actions may be assumed natural occurrences since the phase e#ists apart from the physical (orld. )n addition to techni2ues that allo( interaction (ith the physical setting and surroundings of the phase methods must learned and applied to counteract fear if it forces a practitioner to consciously and consistently lea&e the phase. 1 practitioner does not ha&e to kno( all the primary skills by heart but it is necessary to pay close attention to some of them- emergency return creation of &ision translocation through ob%ects contact (ith animate ob%ects and for many skills dedicated to fighting fear (ill also pro&e e#tremely rele&ant. The final choice of methods that re2uire added focus on the part of the practitioner must be made on the basis of personal e#periences and problems faced (hile in the phase since different practitioners often ha&e completely different types of problems. DISCE9NING #7E P73SE

Problems (ith phase identification during entry often arise at the initial stages of studying the phase. 1 practitioner simply cannot understand (hether or not he or she is already in the phase. This uncertainty can manifest (hile lying do(n or (hile practicing in other postures. )f a practitioner is simply lying do(n physically percei&ing his o(n body and doing nothing then it is indeed difficult to determine (hether or not he is present in the phase. )t is sufficient to note that there might be no signs of a phase state. On the contrary there may be a host of signs and unusual sensations but they by no means necessarily indicate the onset of the phase. The problem of the uncertainty of a phase state is al(ays sol&ed through actions. )f the practitioner is lying do(n then standard separation techni2ues may produce indication of phase achie&ement " in the ma%ority of cases I since such techni2ues may often be incorrectly performed. )t is possible to perform techni2ues that are only achie&able in the phase state. )f a practitioner stands up and does not recogni=e his surroundings then it can be assumed that the practitioner is standing up in the phase. 6o(e&er often based on the obser&ation that !e&erything is as in reality$ a practitioner may stand up and note that e&erything is in fact !as in reality$ simply because the practitioner is still in !reality$. )n ans(er to this dilemma the phenomenon of hyper"concentration has been pre&iously mentioned in relation to maintaining phase. 5y using hyper"concentration it is al(ays possible to ascertain (hether the practitioner is in the phase. 6o(e&er as a rule hyper"concentration is rarely necessary. Most often the follo(ing signs indicate that separation has occurred in the phase- unusual sensations in the body during mo&ement e#treme tightness during mo&ement a strong physical urge to lie back do(n dis%ointedness of surroundings and blurred or complete absence of &ision. Often the problem resides in the use of direct techni2ues (here the practitioner e#pects fast results and attempts to determine (hether the phase has been achie&ed. 1s a principle this should not be done. .hen using direct techni2ues the phase manifests itself clearlyJ

therefore if an attempt to determine its presence is made it is an indicator that the phase is 2uite likely still far off. EME9GENC8 9E#49ND P393;8SIS 4tatistics sho( that in one"third of initial phase e#periences a practitioner is faced (ith a degree of fear that forces a return to the body. Periodically e&en e#perienced practitioners face situations that re2uire an abrupt return to (akefulness. This presents a number of concerns. )n and of itself returning to the body is almost al(ays unproblematicJ remembering and thinking about the body often suffices and (ithin moments the practitioner is returned to the body from (hate&er location in the phase. 1dmittedly it is ad&isable during this type of situation to shut the eyes and abstain from touching anything. 1s a rule (hen these actions are performed simply standing up in the physical (orld is all that is re2uired to complete a returnJ ho(e&er this is not al(ays simply achie&ed. 4ometimes after reentering the body the practitioner suddenly reali=es that physical functionality has ceased due to the onset of sleep paralysis or the sensation that the body has been s(itched off. 7uring sleep paralysis it is impossible to scream call for help or e&en mo&e a finger. )n the ma%ority of cases it is also impossible to open the eyes. From a scientific point of &ie( this is a case of an abrupt unnatural interruption of the rapid eye mo&ement FREMG phase of sleep during (hich this paralysis is al(ays present and it can persist for some time after the phase is interrupted. This is (here it gets interesting. People in the physical (orld are accustomed to an important rule- if you (ish to achie&e something then do it and do it as acti&ely as possible. This rule though good is not al(ays applicable to certain conditions linked to the phase and applies least of all to e#iting the phase. 4ometimes e#treme effort makes it possible to break through sleep paralysis and resume mo&ement though most of these efforts tend to e#acerbate immobility.

7ue to the unusual nature of a negati&e situation follo(ing a deliberate fear"induced return to the body the depth of the phase may greatly increase because of the bodyDs natural protecti&e inhibition of functions originating in the cerebral corte#J this results in e&en greater agitation greater fear. The paralysis gro(s stronger. This is a &icious circle that leads to unpleasant feelings and emotions (hich may e&aporate any desire to practice the phase. )gnorance of correct procedures has led to the (idespread opinion that such ad&erse situations may make it impossible to come back from the phase at all. These opinions suppose that it is therefore dangerous to get in&ol&ed (ith the practice. 6o(e&er the solution to this problem rests in &ery simple actions and procedures that can pre&ent a large number of negati&e e#periencesCo'plete 9ela*ation )n the section on deepening and maintaining it (as noted that the more acti&e a practitioner is (hile in the phase the better. ,on&ersely if there is less acti&ity the 2uality of the phase declines allo(ing for an easy e#it. Thus in order to lea&e the phase the practitioner only needs to completely rela# and ignore any percei&ed sensations actions or thoughts. 1 practitioner may also recite a prayer mantra or rhyme since that helps the consciousness to be distracted from the situation more 2uickly. Of course one needs to calm do(n and try to get rid of the fear (hich in and of itself is capable of keeping such a state going. Periodically the practitioner should try to mo&e a finger in order to check (hether attempts at rela#ation ha&e had an effect. Con entration on a /inger 1 practitioner e#periencing sleep paralysis should try mo&ing a finger or a toe. 1t first this (onDt (ork but the practitioner has to concentrate precise thought and effort on the action. 1fter a little (hile the physical finger (ill begin to mo&e. The problem (ith this techni2ue is that the practitioner may accidentally start making phantom motions instead of physical mo&ements (hich is (hy an

understanding of the difference bet(een the t(o sensations is necessary since it is often not &ery ob&ious.

Con entration on Possi0le Mo>e'ents The physiology of sleep paralysis the phase state and dreams are such that (hen the practitioner is in one of these states some actions are al(ays associated (ith mo&ements made in the real body. This is true (hen mo&ing the eyeballs the tongue or (hile breathing. )f the practitioner concentrates attention on these processes it is possible counteract inhibitions to physical mo&ementJ as a result a sleep" paraly=ed practitioner (ill become able to mo&e in reality. 9ee>aluating the Situation Under normal circumstances deliberate e#it from the phase is not the norm. 7eliberate e#it is commonly caused by certain fears and pre%udices. )f a practitioner is not able to acti&ate the body using other emergency return techni2ues a careful consideration the possibilities offered by the phase is recommended. There are many interesting and useful things that can be e#perienced in the phase. .hy ruin the possibility of great opportunity because of a baseless fear/ To be fair it must be noted that emergency e#it techni2ues do not al(ays (ork. 1s a rule after a long period of sleep depri&ation or at the beginning of or in the middle of a nightDs sleep the urge to sleep is so great that it is difficult to resist the sleep paralysis phenomenon. )n this respect ree&aluating the situation is highly recommended so that a practitioner is able to take ad&antage of the situation &ersus suffering by it. 4leep paralysis is easily transmuted into a phase state by means of indirect techni2ues. By the &ay, +no&ing ho& to e#it paralysis is i$portant not only for practitioners of the phase, since such paralysis occurs even &ithout the phase for appro#i$ately one-third of the hu$an population at least once in a lifeti$e( -t usually happens "efore or after sleep( /IG7#ING /E39

Fear in the phase is a &ery common occurrence. The practitioner may e#perience fear at any stage although it is e#pressed much more clearly during initial practice. The causes of fear are &ery di&erse- a feeling that returning to the body is impossibleJ a fear of deathJ (orrying that something bad is going to happen to the bodyJ encountering something scary and terrible in the phaseJ painful sensationsJ o&erly sharp hyper"realistic sensations. One fear dominates all others- the instinct of self"preser&ation (hich (ithout any apparent reason can induce a feeling of absolute horror I a feeling that cannot be e#plained or controlled. For a no&ice stricken by insurmountable fear that causes paralysis there is only one (ay to gradually o&ercome. Each time a no&ice enters the phase an attempt should be made to go a step further than the pre&ious time. For e#ample in spite of feeling terrified the practitioner should try to raise the hands and then mo&e them back to the initial position. The second time the practitioner should attempt to sit do(n. The third time standing up should be attempted. The fourth time (alking around in the phase is ad&ised. Then after incremental steps to(ard e#periencing the harmlessness of the phase state producti&e calm action may ensue. Interesting fact! Fear itself can "e used to enter the phase and re$ain there for a long ti$e( Once fears are allayed, a cal$ed practitioner is e#periences increased difficulty &ith entry into the phase( For a practitioner (ho faces periodical fears reali=ing that there is no real danger encourages progress in practice. Urges to rapidly return to the body are then made baseless. 4ooner or later calmer thought dominates e&ents in the phase and fear happens less often. .hen dealing (ith momentary fear caused by e&ents in the phase the simplest solution is to tackle it head"on and follo( through to the end in order to a&oid a fear"dri&en precedent. )f a practitioner al(ays runs a(ay from undesirable e&ents the e&ents (ill occur more and more fre2uently. )f a practitioner is incapable of facing fear in the

phase it is best to use the translocation techni2ue to tra&el else(here although this solution only produces temporary relief.

C9E3#ION O/ ?ISION 9ision is often a&ailable at the &ery beginning of a phase especially (hen the practitioner uses image obser&ation and &isuali=ation techni2ues to enter. 4ometimes &ision appears (ithin the first fe( seconds. Other times it manifests during the deepening process. 6o(e&er there are cases (here &ision is not a&ailable and must be created 2uickly at any cost. 9ision may arri&e as soon as it is thought about but if this does not occur a special techni2ue is necessary. To create &ision a practitioner needs to bring the hands four to si# inches in front of the eyes and try to detect them through the grayness or darkness. Peering aggressi&ely and attenti&ely at the minute details of the palms (ill cause them to appear much like they are being de&eloped on Polaroid film. 1fter se&eral seconds &ision (ill become clear and along (ith the palms the surroundings (ill also become &isible. Under no circumstances should the physical eyelids be opened. 9ision (ill appear on its o(n and (ill not differ from that of reality and the physical sensation of opened eyes (ill emerge. )t is possible to shut the eyes in the phase an infinite number of times e&en (ithout ha&ing opened them at all since the latter is not needed for creating &ision. The physical eyelids may be open only (hile e#periencing a &ery deep phase. )n a shallo( phase opening the eyes (ill cause a return to (akefulness. The practitioner must also keep in mind that &ision should only be created after a complete separation from the body and a subse2uent translocation has been achie&ed. 1ttempting to &ie( the hands during flight or (hile ho&ering in an unidentified space leads to arbitrary translocation. CON#3C# (I#7 ;I?ING OBGEC#S T(o problems may surface (hile con&ersing (ith animate ob%ects in the phase- silence or a return to the body. )n &ie( of the fact that many phase applications are based on contact (ith people for one

purpose or another it is necessary to understand ho( to correctly manage contact (ith li&ing ob%ects. )n order to a&oid a foul Fe%ection from the phase into realityG the elementary rules of !maintaining$ must be obser&ed. 1cti&ely obser&ing the facial features or clothing of a person you (ant to communicate (ith. .hile communicating the practitioner should constantly rub the hands together or maintain strong &ibrations by straining the brain. Remember to perform the techni2ues to a&oid becoming absorbed in communication. 1 more comple# problem is o&ercoming the communicati&e unresponsi&eness of ob%ects in the phase. )n many cases the speech of an ob%ect is blocked by the internal stress of the practitioner. 4ometimes the problem stems from an e#pectation that an ob%ect (ill not be able to communicate in the phase. )t is important to treat the ob%ects in a calm manner. There is no use trying to shout or beat the ob%ect to force communication. On the contrary it is much more effecti&e to treat the ob%ect gently (ithout applying pressure. 7o not peer at an ob%ectDs mouth e#pecting sounds to emerge. )t is better to look else(hereJ taking a passi&e interest in communication generally yields the best results. 1s a rule the first time that communication (ith a li&ing ob%ect is successful future attempts go unhindered. ,ommunication methods in the phase are should be no different than those used in ordinary life- talking facial e#pressions gesturing (ith the hands body language. Telepathy is not necessary. 9E3DING Reading te#t in the phase may be accompanied by a number of difficulties. First small print becomes illegible because the affects of hyper"concentration may distort te#t. This problem is sol&ed by using large"font te#tual sources of information. For e#ample the te#t of a normal book blurs (hen obser&ed too attenti&ely but the large font on the co&er of a book is easily read since its si=e is sufficient for rapid reading (ithout detailed scrutiny.

The second problem encountered (hile reading in the phase is (hen te#t is legible but is completely meaningless in compositionJ gibberish. This problem is sol&ed by turning o&er the pages looking for a readable message. )t is also possible to find another copy or create it ane( using the ob%ect"finding techni2ues. The same applies to cases (here the te#t is seen as a set of incomprehensible symbols or signs. .hile reading in the phase the practitioner should not forget about performing !maintaining$ techni2ues to pre&ent a foul by becoming too rela#ed. ?IB93#IONS The phase is often accompanied by an unforgettably unusual sensation that may be used successfully to enter deepen or maintain the phase. )t is difficult to describe it better than the sensation of a hea&y current passing through the entire body (ithout causing any pain. )t may also feel like the (hole body is contracting or a tingling sensation similar to numbness. Most often the sensations are similar to high"fre2uency &ibrations of the body (hich e#plains the origin of the term !&ibration$. )f the practitioner is not sure (hether or not he e#perienced &ibrations then there is a good method to sol&e his problem- if he really did he (ill not ha&e any doubts about it. )n all other cases (hen there are doubts and uncertainty the practitioner is definitely not dealing (ith &ibrations or is dealing (ith another form thereof. )f you ha&e e#perienced &ibrations at least once the recollection of these sensations helps greatly during the simultaneous application of indirect techni2ues. They are created supported and strengthened by straining the brain or tensing the body (ithout using the muscles. For &ibrations to appear it often suffices merely to think about them. 7uring the first e#perience one should e#periment (ith them for a (hile by rolling them around the body and its parts as (ell as strengthening and (eakening them.

0o&ever, one should not thin+ that the presence of vi"rations is a necessary condition for "eing in the phase( Many no&ices often stri&e not for the phase but for &ibrations after (hich the former must supposedly follo(. That should not be the case. There are indeed specific techni2ues that make it possible to get into the phase by creating &ibrations but in all other cases they are not necessary and some practitioners may ne&er ha&e them at all. #EC7NI<4ES /O9 #93NS;OC3#ING #79O4G7 OBGEC#S )n a deep phase the properties of the surrounding en&ironment become &ery similar to the physical (orld. 6o(e&er it may sometimes be necessary to pass through a (all or translocate to a&oid a physical barrier in the phase. There are t(o basic options for passing through barriers like (alls. Usually mastering these re2uires se&eral attempts. Interesting fact! -f a practitioner concentrates on the physical sensations associated &ith passing through a &all, it is possi"le to get stuc+( % practitioner $ay even e#perience the feeling of o"structed "reathing &hen this happens( %t such a ti$e it is necessary to return to the "ody( 9apid Defo used Penetration Run or %ump at a (all (ith a burning desire to penetrate it. 7onDt focus on the (allJ instead concentrate on the immediate surroundings. 7o not try to take anything from the current location since this may impede a successful passage through the (all. #he Closed Eyes #e hni$ue .hen approaching a (all the practitioner must close his eyes and completely focus on a desire to pass through it (hile imagining that

the (all does not e#ist or that it is transparent and penetrable. 4urface resistance should be pressed through continuing on (ith the aggressi&e desire and concentration. /;IG7# Taking flight in the phase is a simple matter of remembering past dreams of flight. 'othing needs to be tensed no (ord need to be said. 1ttempting flight (ith closed eyes produces a high rate of success but presents an increased probability of inad&ertent translocation. )f a flight attempt is unsuccessful a practitioner may try %umping from a high ele&ation or from a (indo(. The natural instinct of dream flight takes o&er and the fall becomes a controlled flight. 6o(e&er %umping from (indo(s or other ele&ations is ad&isable only to practitioners (ith e#perience since no&ices may not al(ays be able to determine (hether they are in the phase or in reality. 1nother (ay to fly is to try to suspend oneself in the air (hen %umping up. S4PE9-3BI;I#IES The realism of the phase space does not impose limits on the ability to perform actions that cannot be performed in the physical (orld. )t is important to remember that only a practitionerDs apprehension places limits on (hat may be done in the phase. For e#ample if a practitioner needs to get to a location " e&en &ery far a(ay " it may be reached by teleportation. )f an ob%ect needs to be mo&ed from one side of the room to the other it may be mo&ed by telekinesis. One of the ma%or benefits of the phase e#perience is unencumbered freedom of action. To master unusual abilities only a fe( phases need to be spent in concentrated de&elopment of the methods. #ele!inesis

)n order to learn telekinesis Fmo&ing ob%ect by thoughtG the practitioner concentrate on an ob%ect (hile e#periencing a deepened phase and attempt to mo&e the ob%ect by thinking about the mo&ement. The only re2uired action is aggressi&e &isuali=ation of the ob%ectDs mo&ement. 'o specific e#ternal actions are re2uired. Telekinetic ability is inherent to e&ery human being. )f attempts are unsuccessful at first press on. 5efore too long the full effect of the practitionerDs (ill yield results. Using this ability helps to encourage a good phase e#perience by pro&iding a tool for carrying out planned tasks. Pyro!inesis )gniting an ob%ect in the phase %ust by staring at it re2uires a strong desire to heat up and set fire to the ob%ect. Performed successfully an ob%ect (ill smoke distort darken and then burst into flames. #elepathy To de&elop telepathy in the phase it is necessary to peer at animate ob%ects (hile listening surrounding e#ternal and internal sounds (ith the intention of hearing thoughts e#pressed by thought. E&en e#perienced practitioners encounter difficulty (hile de&eloping telepathy but (hen successful contact (ith people in the phase is substantially simplified. Using telepathy discerning the thoughts of people animals and ob%ects is possible. 6o(e&er this should not be taken too seriously since it is merely the nature of the phase to simulate (hat is e#pected. #rans'utation Transforming an ob%ectDs form re2uires the techni2ue of transmutation Frefer to ,hapter @G. )t should also be noted that if the goal is not to con&ert something but rather to transform oneself then it is necessary to use the translocation techni2ues Falso described in ,hapter @G (hereby attention has to be concentrated not on the desired place but on the desired form. 6ere again there are no limitations apart from indi&idual courage and fantasy. )t is possible to

become a butterfly or a dinosaur. )t is possible to become a bird or a (orm. )tDs e&en possible to become a child or a person of the opposite se#. These are not simply e#ternal changes but real transmutations (ithin and (ithout. )f a practitioner becomes a butterfly it accompanies the sensation of ha&ing (ings many legs and an unusual body. The practitioner (ill intuiti&ely kno( ho( to control each part of this ne( body. This is a superficial description of the transmutation e#perience (hich ob&iously defies a customary understanding of reality. #7E IMPO9#3NCE O/ CON/IDENCE 1 crucial factor in de&eloping phase abilities is self"confidence in the ability to use the skills. )nitially these abilities are absent because the human brain tuned in to ordinariness blocks confidence in the ability to do anything unusual. 1s soon as strong confidence is reached in the performance of phase abilities all others become easy to achie&e. 1lthough confidence in phase abilities may gro( strong practitioners should remain soundly a(are that abilities in the phase are limited to the phase. 1ttempting telekinesis pyrokinesis or transmutation in the real (orld is a (aste of time and energy. CON#9O;;ING P3IN 1long (ith all the positi&e e#periences and sensations that may be en%oy in the phase painful e#periences nature may also manifest. Punching a (all in a deep phase state (ill cause the same pain as if a (all had been struck in physical reality. 4ome actions in the phase may una&oidably cause unpleasant feelings of painJ therefore it is necessary to kno( ho( to a&oid painful actions. Focusing on an internal confidence that pain (ill not result from an action (ill alle&iate the problem. 1 practitioner may e#periment (ith this type of focus by pummeling a (all (hile resol&ing that there is no pain. )f the e#periment succeeds then

obtaining the same result (ill ne&er again re2uire the same le&el of effortJ thinking that the phase is painless (ill suffice. MO93; S#3ND39DS IN #7E P73SE From the &ery beginning it should be understood that the moral compass of phase space has nothing in common (ith the properties and la(s in the physical (orld that promulgate reality. The phase space seemingly imitates the physical (orld (ith all its properties and functions only because (e are used to percei&ing it and are not e#pecting anything else. Moral principles and rules apply only to the place (here these ha&e been. )t does not make sense to follo( the same rules (hile in the phase. The practitioner should not refrain from certain actions in the phase because some (ould be unacceptable improper or bad in the real (orld. These are merely beha&ioral patterns that are unfounded in the (orld of the phase (here e&erything operates on the basis of entirely different la(s. The only moral rules that might e#ist in the phase are those that the practitioner establishes. )f desired complete unhindered freedom may be e#perienced. S#4D8ING POSSIBI;I#IES 3ND SENS3#IONS 'o&ice practitioners should not immediately rush to(ards a single specific goal if long"term practice is desired. )t is better to e#tensi&ely in&estigate the phase and its surroundings before focusing on accomplishment. This (ill build intimacy (ith the e#perience and allo( unhindered entry and interaction (ith the phase. 1s in reality learning (hate&er first re&eals itself is the key to increasing and speciali=ing kno(ledge. 1 beginning practitioner should at first en%oy the simple fact of actually being in the phase then lean its details and functions. Once inside the phase a

practitioner should e#plore it e#amining and interacting (ith e&erything encountered. 6e should also try to fully sharpen all the possible feelings in the phase in order to fully understand ho( unusual the phase is in its realism. 1 practitioner must e#perience mo&ement- (alking running %umping flying falling s(imming. Test the sensations of pain by striking a (all (ith a fist. The simplest (ay to e#perience taste sensations is to get to the refrigerator and try to eat e&erything that you find there at the same time not forgetting to smell each item. .alk through the (alls translocate create and handle ob%ects. E#plore. 1ll these actions are &ery interesting in and of themsel&es. The possibilities really are infinite. 6o(e&er only (hen they are (ell understood and thoroughly e#plored can it be said that the practitioner really kno(s (hat the phase is about. #8PIC3; MIS#3=ES (I#7 P9IM398 S=I;;S .hen trying to discern (hether or not a phase is intact a %udgment is based on a similarity to the departed physical en&ironment. )n the phase physical attributes are simulations. 6yper"concentrating on an ob%ect for too short a time (hile trying to determine (hether the surroundings are in the phase or in the physical (orld. 7eliberately attempting to end the phase prematurely (hen the entire natural length of the phase should be taken ad&antage of. Panic in case of paralysis instead of calm rela#ed action. Refusal to practice the phase because of fear though this problem is temporary and resol&able. Opening the eyes at the initial stages of the phase since this fre2uently leads to a foul. Premature attempts to create &ision in the phase (hereas separating from the body and deepening should occur. E#cessi&e haste (hile creating &ision although in the ma%ority of cases &ision appears naturally.

 .hile concentrating on the hands to create &ision doing so at an e#cessi&e distance &ersus the recommended four to si# inches. Forgetting about the techni2ues for !maintaining$ (hile in contact (ith li&ing ob%ects. Forgetting to shut the eyes or defocusing &ision (hen translocating through (alls or other solid ob%ects. 7esiring to do something superhuman in the phase (ithout the re2uired internal desire and confidence. Fear of e#periencing pain in the phase instead of learning to control it. Obser&ing moral standards in the phase (hen they do not apply. 1 tendency to immediately use the phase for something practical instead of first thoroughly e#ploring and interacting (ith the surroundings.

E*er ises for Chapter <uestions 1. 1re there skills in the phase that must first be mastered before the phase may be used to its full e#tent/ +. )s it possible to understand (hether a phase is intact by attempting to fly/ 8. 6as a practitioner most likely gotten up in the phase or in reality if there are doubts about this/ :. )s it sufficient to think about the body in order to return to it and is it only re2uired to return into the body in order to control it/ ;. .hich arm should be acti&ely and aggressi&ely mo&ed to o&ercome sleep paralysis/ <. )s it possible to tell %okes to oneself to o&ercome sleep paralysis/ >. )s it possible to mo&e the physical eyes (hile in the phase/ ?. .hat should be done if sleep paralysis cannot be o&ercome/

@. ,an sleep paralysis occur (ithout practicing the phase/ 1A. .hat if fear is not addressed and con2uered/ 11. )s it possible to gradually master the phase in order to o&ercome fear/ 1+. )s there cause for fear of anything in the phase/ 18. 1t (hat point can &ision be created in the phase by opening the eyelids and not through the use of special techni2ues/ 1:. .hat (ould happen (ith an attempt to open the eyes after sitting up in bed i.e. before becoming completely separated from the phase/ 1;. .hy may contact (ith li&ing ob%ects in the phase cause a return to the body/ 1<. .hat problems might occur if a practitioner studies the mouth of a talking ob%ect/ 1>. )n the phase ho( 2uickly can small te#t be read/ 1?. .hich is easier to read in the phase- te#t in a ne(spaper or te#t on a large billboard/ 1@. )s it possible to see hieroglyphs instead of te#t (hile reading in the phase/ +A. )s it possible to burst through a (all after running up to it (ith the eyes shut/ +1. .hich muscles of the body must be tensed to start flying in the phase/ ++. 1re there any e#trasensory abilities that are inaccessible in the phase/ +8. ,an a practitioner transform into a ball (hile in the phase/ +:. 6o( does pain in the phase differ from pain in the physical (orld/ +;. 4hould a practitioner gi&e up a seat to an elderly person (hile in the phase/ +<. 7ue to moral considerations (hat is prohibited in the phase/ #as!s 1. 7uring your ne#t phase session (alk around your home in&estigating the rooms kitchen and bathroom in detail.

+. 0earn to pass through (alls. ,ompletely dedicate one long phase e#perience to perfecting this skill. 8. 0earn to fly in the phase. :. .hile in a deep phase learn to control pain by hitting a (all (ith your fist. ;. .hile in the phase learn telekinesis Fthe ability to mo&e ob%ects by thoughtG and pyrokinesis Fsetting ob%ects on fire also performed by thoughtG. <. 7edicate a lengthy phase e#perience to an e#periment (ith &ision- create it if it is not already a&ailable and then shut your eyes and recreate &ision. 7o this at least ten times o&er the course of a single phase >. 3et ob%ects in the phase to start talking. ?. 7edicate a long phase to searching for different kinds of te#ts in order to e#periment (ith reading &arious si=e fonts.

Chapter . - #ranslo ation and /inding O01e ts

#7E ESSENCE O/ #93NS;OC3#ION 3ND /INDING OBGEC#S 0ike e&eryday reality the phase space cannot be used for certain purposes if it is not kno(n ho( to mo&e around and find necessary things. )n a (akeful state it is more or less kno(n (here something is located and ho( to reach it. )n the phase the same assumptions cannot apply since phase mechanisms (ork by different principles. The reason for addressing translocation and finding ob%ects in the same chapter is because both techni2ues rely on the same mechanics that make the e#istence of these techni2ues possible. )n other (ords the same methods " (ith minor e#ceptions " can be applied to both translocation and finding. 1fter studying the techni2ues described in this chapter a practitioner in the phase (ill be able to go to any location and find any ob%ect. The only limitations that e#ist are those of the imagination and desireJ if these are unlimited so are the possibilities. Regarding translocation attention should not be focused on methods for tra&elling through nearby spaces. For e#ample a practitioner may simply (alk into an ad%acent room or out to the street &ia the corridor or through the (indo(. These are natural easy actions. 1 practitioner should instead concentrate attention on ho( to mo&e to remote destinations that cannot be 2uickly reached by physical means. )t is important to mention the necessary safety procedures for translocation. 4ometimes due to a lack of e#perience a practitioner may mistake the phase for reality and reality may be mistaken for the phase. Mistaking the phase for reality implies no danger since a

practitioner simply belie&es that an entry attempt (as unsuccessful. 6o(e&er if reality is mistaken for the phase a practitioner may perform dangerous or e&en life"threatening actions. For e#ample after getting out of bed in a (akeful state thinking that e&erything is happening in the phase a beginner may approach a (indo( and %ump out of it e#pecting to fly as is customary in the phase. For this reason alone shortcuts to flight should only be taken after gaining a le&el of e#perience that makes it possible to unambiguously distinguish the phase from a (akeful state. )f a glitch occurs (hen practicing translocation techni2ues Ffor e#ample landing in the (rong placeG a practitioner should simply repeat the techni2ue until the desired result is obtained. Either (ay initial training is a must in order to make e&erything easier for you later on. 1s far as ob%ect"finding techni2ues are concerned these are used for both inanimate and animate ob%ects. )n other (ords these techni2ues are e2ually effecti&e for finding for e#ample a person or a utensil. 6o(e&er there are se&eral techni2ues that are only suitable for finding li&ing ob%ects. B3SIC P9OPE9#8 O/ #7E P73SE SP3CE 1ll methods for controlling the phase space stem from a primary la(- the degree of changeability of the phase space is in&ersely proportionate to the depth of the phase and the stability of its ob%ects. That is the deeper and more stable the phase the more difficult it is to perform something unusual in it because in a deep stable phase the la(s of it begin to closely resemble those of the physical (orld.

1ll translocation and finding ob%ects techni2ues are based on the kno(ledge of methods that bypass the primary la(. The secret lies in the fact that not only phase depth affects the controllability of the phase but so does phase stability (hich in turn depends to a large e#tent on the number of sensations e#perienced in the phase. The techni2ues for translocation and finding ob%ects are used (hen these e#perienced sensations are (eakened through certain actions. )n other (ords if a practitioner located in the phase holds a red pencil and e#amines it tactile and &isual perceptions are engaged (hich under sharp agitation cause the ob%ect to e#ist in its complete form. 6o(e&er as soon as the eyes are shut the stability of pencil image (eakens. )n this situation it (ill be enough for the practitioner Fafter sufficient trainingG to concentrate on belie&ing that the pencil is dark"blue in order for it to appear dark blue after opening the eyes. This phenomenon occurs because the color of the pencil is no longer determined by perceptual areas of the brain and therefore it is possible to change it. )f a red pencil is placed on a table and the practitionerDs eyes are shut and there is concentration on a thought that the pencil is no

longer on the table then after opening the eyes the practitioner (ill find that the pencil has disappeared. )n essence (hen the pencil is lying on the table and the practitionerDs eyes are closed and the pencil is not being held no perception is being in&ested in the pencil (hich the practitioner deletes using autosuggestion.

Using certain techni2ue"related methods a practitioner may cause the stability of the phase state to remain in flu# using techni2ues that best suit the practitionerDs indi&idual personality. #EC7NI<4ES /O9 #93NS;OC3#ION #ranslo ation through #eleportation This is one of the simplest and most accessible techni2ues that beginners should use right a(ay. To apply it shut the eyes Fif &ision is presentG and then concentrate attention on a thought"form or image of a location else(here in the phase. 1t this moment there (ill be a string sensation of s(ift flight and (ithin t(o to 1A seconds the destination (ill be reached. The success of this techni2ue depends on a strong concentration upon a single goal- the desired location. Practice must be performed &ery clearly confidently aggressi&ely and (ithout distractions. 1ny unrelated thoughts ha&e a profoundly negati&e influence on the

performance of this techni2ue. They unnecessarily prolong the flight cause a foul or result in arri&ing at an undesired location. #ranslo ation through a Door )n order to use this techni2ue approach any door (ith the strong belief that it leads to the re2uired location. 1fter opening the door the practitioner (ill see and be able to step into the destination. )f the door (as originally open it must be completely shut before applying the techni2ue. 1 dra(back to this techni2ue is that its practice al(ays re2uires a door. )f there is no door users of this translocation techni2ue should create one using an ob%ect finding techni2ue. #ranslo ation through #eleportation 6ith the Eyes Open This techni2ue is difficult because it re2uires an unstable phase space caused by a strong desire to translocate to another location. 7uring teleportation by teleportation (ith eyes shut the practitioner disengages from the current location. .hereas during teleportation by flight (ith eyes shut the practitioner disentangles himself from the current location that is not the case here. Therefore this techni2ue should be used only by e#perienced practitioners (ho are confident that they are capable of remaining in the phase. 1s far as implementing the techni2ue is concerned the practitioner simply needs to stop and concentrate on the thought that he is already present in the desirable location and focus on its image. )t is important to not stare at or touch anything during the thought. 4urrounding space (ill dim blur and then disappear during this time and then the intended location (ill gradually start to appear. The rate of space metamorphosis depends on the degree of desire to reach the re2uired location. )f concentration is (eak or phase depth is poor then after space destabili=es it may not be restored " and a return to the (akeful state (ill occur. #ranslo ation 6ith Closed Eyes

This is one of the easiest techni2ues. To use this techni2ue the practitioner simply needs to shut the eyes and ha&e an intense desire that (hen the eyes are ne#t opened the re2uired location (ill be reached. )n order to considerably increase the effecti&eness of this techni2ue it (ould be useful to imagine at the moment you close your eyes that you ha&e already reached the desired location. Translocation must occur then and it has to happen (ithout the flight sensations that occur during teleportation (ith closed eyes. Translocation must occur right then and it has to happen (ithout the flight that occurs in teleportation (ith closed eyes (hich must be a&oided. #ranslo ation 0y Con entration on a 9e'ote O01e t To perform this techni2ue the practitioner should peer from a distance at a minor detail of the desired location. The greater an intention to see an ob%ectDs detail the 2uicker the arri&al at the ob%ectDs location. 1 dra(back to this techni2ue is that this type of translocation is possible only for places that are already &isible albeit from a great distance. #ranslo ation during Separation The simplest (ay to translocate is to do so (hile separating from the body. Employing this techni2ue is e#tremely simple and &ery con&enient. )t may be combined (ith almost any separation techni2ue and is performed by focusing on the image and feel of a desired location during the initial stages of e#iting the body. )t is e&en better to imagine that phase entry (ill occur and separation (ill complete in a chosen location. Interesting fact! %fter having changed his place of residence, the practitioner &ill very often continue for so$e ti$e to separate fro$ the "ody in the sa$e house &here he &as used to doing this previously(

1 dra(back of this techni2ue is that separation occurs only in the beginning of the phase e#perience and therefore can only be used once. Other options should be considered after the first translocation. #ranslo ation 0y Passing through a (all This techni2ue is performed by (alking or flying through a (all (ith the eyes shut and a firm con&iction that the re2uired location is behind the (all. The barrier does not necessarily ha&e to be a (all. )t can be any non"transparent ob%ect through (hich a practitioner may (alk or fly- a screen a (ardrobe and so on. The main dra(back of this techni2ue is the necessity of appropriate skills for penetrating through solid ob%ects of the phase. 1nother necessary condition for applying this techni2ue is the presence of barriers to pass through. #ranslo ation through Di>ing This techni2ue is identical to passing through (alls (ith the only difference being instead of a (all " (hich may not al(ays be a&ailable " the practitioner (ill use the floor or the ground. The practitioner must di&e headfirst (ith the eyes shut and ha&e complete confidence that the re2uired location is underneath the solid surface. The ability to pass through solid ob%ects is naturally also re2uired. 1 practitioner may di&e through the floor or the ground and also into any flat hori=ontal surface- a table a chair a bed and so forth. #ranslo ation through 9otation 1pply this techni2ue a practitioner in the phase (ill to start rotating on an a#is (hile simultaneously concentrating on a belief that a desired location (ill be reached once rotation is stopped. The eyes must be shut during the rotation or &ision must not be focused on anything in particular. 1s a rule t(o to fi&e re&olutions on an a#is are sufficient. Once again e&erything depends on the ability to fully concentrate on a desired goal (ithout any distractions.

OBGEC# /INDING #EC7NI<4ES #e hni$ue of #ranslo ation 1ll translocation techni2ues are also applicable to ob%ect finding techni2ues since the use of both techni2ues re2uires altering the surrounding the space. )nstead of concentrating on a location the practitioner is to focus on the specific detail of a space that is to be found or changed. 1s a result finding the necessary ob%ect Fpro&ided this techni2ue has been masteredG is guaranteed but maintaining the original location (here the action begins is not guaranteed. )f the goal is to find an ob%ect (hile remaining in the present location use the speciali=ed techni2ues described later on- techni2ues that change only a portion of the phase space. /inding 0y Calling a Na'e This techni2ue is only used to find li&ing ob%ects. The practitioner must call a person or an animal by name to cause the animate phase resident to enter or appear nearby. The call should be loud nearly a shout other(ise it (ill not al(ays (ork. 3enerally it is often enough to pronounce a name se&eral times to achie&e results. )f the desired animate ob%ect does not ha&e a name or the practitioner does not kno( it then any name or general summoning (ill do like !,ome hereH$ This should be done (hile mentally focusing on a clear image of the desired person or animal. /inding 0y In$uiry To perform this techni2ue approach any person in the phase and ask him For herG (here to 2uickly find a desired ob%ect. 1n accurate ans(er is usually gi&en straight a(ay and it should be follo(ed. 6o(e&er to a&oid (asting time do not forget to mention that the ob%ect must be found !2uickly$ or specify that the ob%ect should be !nearby$. 7uring this communication under no circumstances should there be a doubt about the accuracy of the information since other(ise it may lead to a simulation of (hat is e#pected.

The dra(back of this techni2ue is that it re2uires the presence of an animate person and good skill at communicating (ith ob%ects in the phase (hich can pro&e difficult. /inding 0y #urning 3round )n order to use this techni2ue the practitioner must concentrate and imagine that the re2uired ob%ect is located some(here behind his back and after turning around he (ill actually see it there e&en if it (as not there %ust a moment earlier. This (orks best if the practitioner prior to turning around did not &ie( the place (here the ob%ect is e#pected to appear. /inding 3round a Corner .hen approaching any corner concentrate and imagine the re2uired ob%ect is %ust around the corner. Then after turning the corner the ob%ect (ill be found. 1nything that limits space &isibility may be regarded as a corner. This does not ha&e to be the corner of a house or another type of buildingJ it could be the corner of a (ardrobe the corner of a truck etc. The dra(back of this techni2ue is that it re2uires the a&ailability of a sufficiently large corner that blocks the &ie( of anything around the other side of it. /inding in the 7and This techni2ue is in essence only applicable to finding ob%ects that can fit in or be held by the hand. To perform this techni2ue concentrate on the idea that the ob%ect is already in hand. 1t that moment the practitioner must not look at it. 4oon after beginning to concentrate on this idea the practitioner (ill at first feel a slight sensation of the ob%ect lying in his hand follo(ed by a full sensation and appearance of the desired ob%ect. /inding 0y #rans'utation This techni2ue distorts the phase space (hile not completely disengaging a perception of the space. The practitioner must gi&e strong attention to a thought that a re2uired ob%ect is going to appear

in a desired location. There must be sufficient confidence that the practitionerDs desires (ill be reali=ed. 1t this moment the process of metamorphosis (ill begin- space (ill distort and dim and the re2uired ob%ect (ill begin to manifest itself. 1fter this brightness and focus (ill be restored (ith necessary alterations made present in the phase space. This techni2ue is relati&ely difficult to perform in comparison to others and therefore it is better to use it only after a high le&el of e#perience has been reached because it is difficult to remain in the phase during any metamorphic process. 1s is e&ident in the name of this techni2ue it can be used to find ob%ects and also create ne( ob%ects from found ob%ects. #8PIC3; MIS#3=ES (I#7 #93NS;OC3#ION 3ND /INDING OBGEC#S 1pplying translocation and ob%ect finding techni2ues (ithout the precondition of a steady phase. )nsufficient concentration on a desire to tra&el to a location or to find an ob%ect. 7oubting that results (ill be achie&ed instead of ha&ing complete confidence. Passi&e performance of the techni2ues instead of a strong desire and high le&el of aggression. Forgetting to repeat translocation or ob%ect finding techni2ues (hen the techni2ue did not (ork or (orked incorrectly during the first attempt. 3etting distracted by e#traneous thoughts during the lengthy process of teleporting (ith eyes shut. Total concentration is re2uired at all times. 1pplying the techni2ue of teleportation (ith eyes open (ithout ade2uate e#perience. Failing to immediately translocate (hen using the closed eyes techni2ueJ this may induce flying a la the teleportation techni2ue.

 3lossing o&er minute details or only obser&ing the broad features of a remote ob%ect (hile applying translocation by concentration. 1 delayed desire to mo&e (hile translocating during separation. 1n instantaneous desire to immediately mo&e is necessary. Forgetting to first shut a door completely (hen using translocation through a doorJ other(ise there (ill be contact (ith (hat is already behind it. Using a translocation techni2ue to go through a (all (ithout kno(ing ho( to pass through solid ob%ects. Paying too much attention to the process of translocation through a (allJ this leads to being trapped in the (all. Forgetting to shut the eyes (hile translocating di&ing headfirst. The eyes should remain closed until after the techni2ue is complete. )nsufficient internal association (ith an animate ob%ect (hile finding it by calling its name. Trying to find an ob%ect &ia interrogation instead of passi&ely communicating (ith li&ing ob%ects of the phase. Using distant corners (hen applying the techni2ue of finding an ob%ect around the corner. ,hoose nearby corners to a&oid (asting precious tra&el time. 1pplying transmutation techni2ues (ithout possessing sufficient e#perience in managing F!maintaining$G the phase space.

E*er ises for Chapter .

<uestions 1. .hat becomes possible (ith the ability to translocate in the phase/ +. .hat becomes possible (ith the ability to find ob%ects in the phase/ 8. .hat do translocation and finding ob%ects techni2ues ha&e in common/

:. .hat is the sole limitation on the possibilities offered by translocation and finding ob%ects/ ;. 6o( may one translocate across &ery short distances/ <. .hen the flight techni2ue by %umping out of a (indo( be attempted/ >. .hat should be done if translocation and ob%ect finding techni2ues do not yield the re2uired result/ ?. )s it possible to find a person from real life using the techni2ue of finding ob%ects/ @. 7oes the stability of space decrease in a deep phase/ 1A. .hat are the fundamental components of space and ob%ect stability/ 11. 6o( large is the role of auditory perception in the stability of space/ 1+. .hat is most important (hile using a teleportation techni2ue/ 18. .hat does speed of mo&ement depend on during teleportation/ 1:. 4hould a no&ice apply the techni2ue of teleportation (ith open eyes/ 1;. .hat techni2ue might the translocation (ith closed eyes techni2ue turn into/ 1<. 4hould large or small details be scrutini=ed (hile translocating by concentration on remote ob%ects/ 1>. )s the techni2ue of translocation during separation applied after separation or (hile beginning to separate/ 1?. .hen applying the techni2ue of translocation through a dooris it better if the door is open or closed/ 1@. .hy might translocation by passing through a (all fail/ +A. .hen using translocation by di&ing is it important to be in a place (here there is something to stand on/ +1. .hile applying the techni2ue of rotation should rotation be imagined or real/ ++. )s it possible to use a translocation techni2ue to attempt finding ob%ects/ +8. .hen using the techni2ue of calling by name (hat should be done if the name of a desired person in the phase is unkno(n/

+:. .hile looking for an ob%ect using the method of in2uiry is it important to specify that the ob%ect needs to be found !2uickly$/ +;. 6o( far back must a turn occur (hen the techni2ue of finding ob%ects by turning is being used/ +<. .ould the corner of a fence be suitable for applying the techni2ue of finding ob%ects around the corner/ +>. )s it necessary to shut the eyes (hile using the transmutation techni2ue/ #as!s 1. 7edicate the ne#t three phases to e#periments (ith translocation techni2ues using all of them and tra&elling (here&er you (ant. +. 1fter e#periencing three phases dedicated to translocation select the techni2ues that (ork best for you. 8. 7uring the ne#t phase tra&el to the Eiffel To(er to the Moon and to the homes of some of your relati&es. :. 7edicate the ne#t three phases to e#periments (ith the full range of techni2ues for finding ob%ects including translocation techni2ues. ;. 1fter three phases dedicated to finding ob%ects select the techni2ues that you are most comfortable (ith. <. )n the ne#t phase that you e#perience find your mother and then at the same location locate this te#tbook a red globe and a green rose.

Chapter 12 - 3ppli ation

#7E ESSENCE O/ 3PP;IC3#IONS /O9 P73SE S#3#ES Phase perception initially causes so much emotion and &ariety of e#perience that the practitioner is often not concerned (ith the 2uestion of ho( the phase might be purposefully used. The critical 2uestion of application becomes e&en more critical as e#perience increases. 1pplication of the phase becomes more &i&id against the background of understanding ho( the phenomenon can pro&ide a means of gaining information and ne( e#periences. 4ome approach the phase practice (ith a predetermined goal uninterested in anything else. .ith a specific goal a problem may arise in the origination of the goal because the phase phenomenon is (rapped in a thick layer of pre%udices and stereotypes (hich often ha&e no bearing on the reality. The primary purpose of this chapter is to precisely separate reality from fiction. )ts second purpose is to pro&ide a detailed description of (hat may be obtained from the practice of phase e#periences. E&ery pro&en and accessible practical application of the phase is based on three 2ualities- aG application founded on the phaseDs ability to simulate any ob%ect and any space (ith any properties and functionsJ bG application based on the opportunity to connect (ith the subconscious mind in order to obtain informationJ cG application based on the phaseDs ability to impact a practitionerDs physiology. Most importantly nothing described in this chapter is difficult to achie&e. 1ny application may be achie&ed during the &ery first phase if a practitioner manages to focus and apply the appropriate techni2ues for translocation or finding ob%ects. Regardless of (hether

the practitioner adheres to a mystical or pragmatic (orld&ie( a full range of access is inherently possible. Possible applications of the phenomenon certainly e#ceed the scope of descriptions related through this chapter. )t is possible that other applications simply ha&e not been pro&en yet and so far the correct methods of practicing these unkno(n. Only the practitioner may determine the limits of possibility (ithin the phase. Of course common sense should be applied or it (ould be logically and psychologically difficult to disengage misconceptions. The goal of this chapter is to provide a real Bthough $ini$al) foundation that is fir$ and unyielding, &hatever the circu$stance( -f the practitioner follo&s a strict approach to practice, it &ill "e $uch $ore difficult to "eco$e lost during further practical and theoretical studies( 3PP;IC3#IONS B3SED ON SIM4;3#ION Many (onder about the nature of the phase state in relation to the brain i.e. (hether or not the phase is all in oneDs head. 5ut in the conte#t of applying the phase this is not a &alid concern. Perception of the entire physical en&ironment is performed through sensory organs. )n the phase perception is the same sometimes e&en more realistic. .hether e&erything described in this chapter occurs in reality or is merely simulated makes no difference in terms of the encountered sensations. #ra>elling %round the &orld' )t is possible to reach any point of the planet and it is particularly interesting to re&isit places (here the practitioner once li&ed or &isited and &isit places that the practitioner has a strong desire to &isit. E&ery sight and beauty of the Earth become accessible be it the Eiffel To(er or an island in Oceania the Pyramids of Egypt or 1ngel Falls. Through Outer Space- 1lthough humankind is not going to reach Mars any time soon any practitioner may stand on its surface and e#perience its uni2ue landscape through the use of translocation

in the phase. There is nothing more ama=ing than obser&ing gala#ies and nebulae planets and stars from the &antage pint of &ast space. Of all phase applications a&ailable this one pro&ides practitioners (ith the most striking aesthetic e#periences. To different places in ti$e' This makes it possible to &isit a childhood to see (hat a person (ill look like in the futureJ a pregnant (oman in the phase may see (hat her child (ill look like. Tra&el far back in time and (itness the construction of the Pyramids at 3i=a see Paris in the 1>th century (ander among the dinosaurs of the Curassic period. Through different &orlds' Tra&el a (orld that has been described in literature or %ust in&ented by the practitioner de&eloped in the imagination. These could be e#traterrestrial ci&ili=ations parallel (orlds or uni&erses from fairy tales and films. 1ny destination is nearby. En ounters 5ith relatives' 4ince relati&es cannot al(ays see each other there is the remarkable possibility to meet each other and talk in the phase. Of course this does not entail mutual presence. )t is enough for one person to possess the re2uired desire " the second person may ne&er e&en kno(. Reali=ing the desire to contact a close relati&e and e#change information is a treasure. 5ith ac4uaintances' ,ircumstances often pre&ent seeing people (ho are important. This is an opportunity to reali=e a desire and finally meet that certain person again. 5ith the dead' Regardless of the nature of the phase phenomenon nothing else yields the possibility to see talk to and embrace a deceased lo&ed one. These are &i&id personal e#periences accessible to e&eryone and achie&ing these encounters does not re2uire ma%or difficulty. ,ourage is the only necessity. From a techni2ue"related point of &ie( a stable phase and application of the finding ob%ects techni2ue sets the stage for (hat at first may seem impossible. )t should be noted that (hen a deceased person is encountered in the phase the distortions caused by the ob%ect finding

techni2ue may lead to some &ery undesirable occurrences. )f you are interested in this sub%ect you should carefully study the guidebook :ontact &ith the 3eceased Fauthor- Michael RadugaG. 5ith cele"rities' Through the use of ob%ect finding techni2ues a practitioner has the opportunity to meet any famous person. This could be a historical persona a contemporary politician or an artist. )n the phase state they are all accessible for any type of interaction. For e#ample a practitioner could meet Culius ,aesar Cesus ,hrist 'apoleon ,hurchill 4talin 6itler El&is Presley Marilyn Monroe and a great many others. 9ealiHing Desires E&eryone has dreams. Regardless of (hether they e&er come true in reality they may at least en%oy be reali=ed in the phase. 4ome dream of a &isit to 0as 9egas some to dri&e a Ferrari some &isit Outer 4pace others (ould like to bathe in a pile of money and some desire se#ual e#periences. 1ll of these may finally be e#perienced in the phase. 3lternati>e to the ?irtual (orld )n the phase young men may participate in game battles as if the battles are real. 1 practitioner can &isit unusual (orlds and places (hile en%oying completely realistic sensations feel a (eapon in his hands and e&en the smell of gunpo(der. )f desired e&en the sensation of battle (ounds may be e#perienced. 3aming possibilities in the phase are not limited by the po(er of a microprocessor but the e#tent of a practitionerDs imagination. Creati>e De>elop'ent :reating &or+s of art' Using the methods of ob%ect finding or translocation an artistic practitioner can purposefully seek an ob%ect in the phase that may be composed in real life. )f necessary it is possible to easily return to study an ob%ect in the phase. For e#ample a painter may find a stunning landscape and puts it to can&as in the

real (orld (hile periodically returning to the same landscape in the phase. Fie&ing future co$pleted &or+s of art' )f an artist is in the process of reali=ing an idea then a preliminarily look at the end result of a design may be seen in the phase. 1 painter can e#amine a painting in ad&anceJ a sculptor may see a completed sculpture and an architect (ill be able to (ander through a house that is still in the early stages of design. 1ny creati&e (ork can be simulated in the phase. % source of inspiration and fantasy' The phase practice imparts ideas and desires that positi&ely affect creati&e endea&ors. Furthermore the reali=ation of desires and tra&els through unusual spaces e&oke great emotions (hich pro&ide e#cellent inspiration. 3PP;IC3#IONS B3SED ON CON#3C# (I#7 #7E S4BCONSCIO4S MIND 1ssume that the phase state is %ust an e#ceptionally unusual state of brain and that perception (ithin it is no more than an unusually realistic play of its functions. 1ssume that a practitioner in the phase decides to tra&el to a forest. To do so the translocation (ith closed eyes techni2ue is used and as a result a forest appears. .hat happens if the &ision contains &ery detailed kno(ledge of forests (hat forests consist of and (here forests originate/ The brain creates a hyper"realistic space superior to that of e&eryday reality consisting of millions of blades of grass lea&es hundreds of trees and a multitude of sounds. Each blade of grass has depth and build not %ust a point. Each leaf also consists of component parts. 1 uni2ue natural pattern makes up the bark of each tree. 4uddenly a (ind begins to blo( through the forest and millions of lea&es and blades of grass follo(ing a mathematical model of the propagation of air masses begin oscillating in a (a&elike fashion. Thus a certain resource inside us is capable in mere seconds not only of creating millions of details in the desired scene but also to control each of those details indi&iduallyH

E&en if the phase is %ust a state of mind this does not mean that there are no sources of information (ithin it. The mind possesses great computing ability and is e2uipped to imagine the full e#tent of the impossible. 'o computer ho(e&er po(erful is capable of similar feats. 1 practitioner is able to someho( tap into ama=ing resources (hile in the phase. )t only remains to learn e#actly ho( to achie&e mastery. )t is possible that the phase space is go&erned by the subconscious mind. This means that the practitioner is able to contact the subconscious (hile in the phase state. 7uring e&eryday life the subconscious mind sends information based on calculations determined by enormous capabilities. 6o(e&er humans neither hear nor percei&e these signals because people are accustomed to recei&ing information linguistically. The subconscious mind hardly operates (ithin the limitations of language. ,ommunication (ith the subconscious mind on a conscious le&el is only possible (ithin the phase. )f all phase ob%ects are created and controlled by the subconscious mind then it is possible to use them as translators. For e#ample (hen talking to a person in the phase normal (ords are heard (hile the ob%ect and communicated information is controlled by the subconscious mind. 1n e#planation of ho( information is obtained in the phase can hardly be une2ui&ocally pro&en. Perhaps there are other undisco&ered resources. 5ut that is not so important. The most important thing is definitely kno(n- ho( to obtain information in the phase. The algorithm for obtaining information from the phase is not comple#. 1fter entering the phase only the techni2ues for obtaining information and the methods of &erifying it need to be learned to increase in kno(ledge gleaned from the phase.

5ased on the pragmatic e#planation of the nature of the phase as an unusual state of brain controlled by the subconscious it may be assumed that the amount of information obtained in the phase is limited. )f the phase e#ists (ithin the confines of the brain then the brain can only operate on data that has been recei&ed by the brain o&er the course of its e#istence. )ndeed it appears that e&erything percei&ed through the sensory organs is remembered and correlated (ith other dataJ this obser&ation concern conscious and unconscious perception. )f any e&ent is actually a conse2uence of other e&ents (hich (ere in turn also conse2uences of pre&ious happenings then nothing occurs by chance. The initial data is kno(n " then it is possible to calculate (hat is implied by it. 1s a result if e&erything is based solely on the resource of the subconscious mind then information may be obtained about e&erything that is related to an indi&idual life- the practitionerDs e#periences and the e#periences of those (ith (hom the practitioner e#periences life. 0essons are learned from the future and past and the future and past of others. 1ll in all in order to approach kno(ing the (hole of the information a&ailable in the phase personal kno(ledge capacity (ould need to increase by 1AA or e&en 1 AAA times.

The only information that is not a&ailable in the phase is that about (hich the subconscious mind does not ha&e any preliminary information. For e#ample (here to purchase a (inning lottery ticket that (ill (in millions of dollars cannot be learned since there is no data that could support the necessary calculation. The subconscious mind (ill also not be able to sho( the practitioner (hat a random street in a small to(n on the other end of the Earth looks like. 1 practitioner should not try guessing (hat information the subconscious mind has to offer and (hat it doesnDt because mistakes are easily made. For e#ample if a practitioner has ne&er been to Paris and ne&er seen the Eiffel To(er it might be assumed that the practitionerDs subconscious mind kno(s nothing about it either although through o&er the course of life the mind has already recei&ed an enormous 2uantity of information from pictures photographs stories &ideos books and so forth. There are three basic techni2ues for obtaining information in the phase. Each of them has its ad&antages and disad&antages that must be studied and learned before use. 3ni'ate O01e ts #e hni$ueD To perform this method of obtaining information the practitioner in a full deep phase must locate a person by techni2ues for finding ob%ects and procure the necessary information from that person through the use of simple 2uestions. )f the re2uired information is linked to a certain person then that person should be located in the phase. )f the information is not related to anyone in particular then it is possible to create a uni&ersal information source (hich must be associated (ith (isdom and kno(ledge. For e#ample this could be a (ise recluse a (ell"kno(n philosopher or a guru. The ad&antage of this techni2ue is that it is easy to pose additional 2uestions and it is also easier to &erify (hate&er information is obtained. 1 dra(back of this techni2ue is that for many it is difficult to communicate (ith li&ing ob%ects in the phase because of ob%ectsD unresponsi&eness or a practitionerDs problems (ith maintaining the phase (hile talking (ith ob%ects.

Inani'ate O01e ts #e hni$ueD Use techni2ues for finding ob%ects in order to locate information from sources like inscriptions books or ne(spapers. .hile trying to locate the source of information remember to concentrate of a belief that (hat is found (ill ha&e the desired information. 4ource types are not limited to paper mediaJ e&en radios or tele&isions may be (atched or listened to and computer search engines and file systems also may produce results. 1 huge dra(back of this techni2ue is that considerable complications arise if an additional or a follo("up 2uestion emerges (hich may cause the practitioner to ha&e to stop and repeat the searching process. The upside to this techni2ue is that if a practitioner has problems communicating (ith animate ob%ects this techni2ue can temporarily ser&e as a reasonable alternati&e. Episode #e hni$ueD )n order to recei&e information using this method imagine an e&ent or series of e&ents that (ill communicate the desired information. Then mo&e to the area (here predetermined e&ents are e#pected to take place by using translocation techni2ues. 1fter arri&ing at the destination use &isual obser&ation to understand (hat is taking place and the information that the e&ents are communicating. The episode techni2ue is suitable only for cases (here information can be obtained by obser&ation. 0o& to verify the infor$ationG The techni2ues for recei&ing information in the phase are not comple# in and pro&e successful after %ust a fe( attempts. 6o(e&er as (as already mentioned earlier the properties of phase spaces that do not fall under the category of &i&id perception are not particularly stable " not only in terms of appearance but also in terms of their properties. ,orrectness of information also depends on the ob%ects themsel&es. The problem rests in that the practitioner may not be able to properly control the ob%ect in 2uestion and may recei&e false information.

Interesting fact! The phase space is not everyday reality@ therefore, it should not "e treated &ith the nor$al "elief that every o"servation should "e regarded as fact( E&en (hen a practitioner has learned to find animate and inanimate ob%ects (ith an absence of doubt there is still no guarantee that the recei&ed information is al(ays accurate. 1 fe( techni2ue" related tricks are able to test an ob%ectDs ability to speak the truth. For e#ample an ob%ect can talk about something (ith absolute confidence but that does not mean that (hat it communicates is all true. )f doubt is e#perienced (hile finding the ob%ect then doubt may ha&e an effect on (hat the ob%ect says. This is (hy doubt must be a&oided at all costs " although beginners are bound to initially ha&e problems (ith this. To determine (hether an ob%ect is able to gi&e accurate information a control 4uestion should be askedJ a 2uestion that the subconscious mind cannot kno( the ans(er to. For e#ample a practitioner might ask a found ob%ect- !.here can ) buy the (inning lottery ticket for the Mega 5all %ackpot/$ )f the ob%ect starts ans(ering such 2uestions seriously going into great detail then the ob%ect should be created ane( since its properties allo( the possibility that it (ill lie. 1 proper ob%ect (ill remain silent or say that it does not kno( the ans(er to the control 2uestion. 1fter accurate information is obtained through the use of a control 2uestion it must be confirmed. This is done by means of a clarifying 4uestion. The practitioner needs to ask the ob%ect (here the information came from to find out the details that offer proof of the informationDs authenticity in the real (orld. The ob%ect may also be asked the same 2uestions more than once pro&ided they are re(orded. The ans(ers to re(orded 2uestions must be identical. Remember the more important the nature of the information and the more serious action it implies the more effort needs to be in&ested in &erifying it in the real (orld since a certain percentage of the information is bound to be incorrect despite correct performance of information"related techni2ues.

3PP;IC3#ION B3SED ON IN/;4ENCING P78SIO;OG8 There are three main elements that (ith the help of the phase may influence the physiology in &ery beneficial (ays. First it is possible to contact the subconscious mind to learn ho( to influence physiology. 4econd the brain reacts more strongly to sensations than to real e&ents. For e#ample if running (hile in the phase the physical processes of the body (ould be consistent (ith the processes occurring in the body of a person running in realityrespiration accelerates blood pressure increases the heartbeat 2uickens and e&en blood flo( to the feet becomes greater. Third (hile the practitioner e#periences profound changes of consciousness in the phase this is (hen all direct and indirect forms of autosuggestion are most effecti&e. 'ot all influences on physiology are 1AAK effecti&e. 6o(e&er e&en (ithout a guaranteed rate of success the effort to influence physiology is (orthy of attention because ama=ing results can be obtained. 1l(ays remember that achie&ing a good result may re2uire repeated influence from the phase. E&en in the physical (orld medications re2uire repeated ingestion. )f the goal is to cure a disease do not rely solely on the phase. 4ick persons must use the phase alongside treatment from physicians. The more serious the illness the more strongly this rule applies. O0taining Infor'ation The diagnosis of health problems may be performed (ith the same techni2ues used for obtaining information. )t is also possible to learn methods to cure health problems if such methods e#ist. 5oth of these possibilities apply to third parties being helped by efforts in the phase. )nformation gathering is the only pro&en (ay to influence the physiology of other people by using the phase. For e#ample it is possible to find a (ell"kno(n healer in the phase and ask about personal health problems or the problems of a friend or family

member. 1 clarified ans(er may be used in the assistance of traditional medical treatment. 3ttention fro' Do tors Find a doctor in the phase by using the techni2ue of finding ob%ects and ask the doctor to take e#amine or treat a kno(n illness or other health problem. For e#ample in case of abdominal pains the doctor may palpate the belly apply pressure to &arious points and perform a special massage. 1ny actions are possible including an operation. 1fter lea&ing the phase the practitioner (ill feel a positi&e result. #a!ing 'edi ines The placebo effect is much stronger in the phase than in reality since all actions occur in a highly modified state of consciousness and are percei&ed directly. Ob%ect locating techni2ues may be used to find medications used to treat e#isting problems. )t is also possible to create self"made substances to produce the desirable effect. For e#ample in case of an acute headache in reality a practitioner may take a painkiller (hile in the phase and its effect (ill be partially felt in the (akeful state. Dire t Effe t 1n illness or problem may be directly affected by actions in the phase. For e#ample a sore throat may be (armed by en&isioning a burning sensation in the throat or by mo&ing to a hot location like a sauna. )f a practitioner (ould like to increase physical fle#ibility then stretching in the phase (ill cause the body to ad%ust to the none#istent action by rela#ing and tensing the corresponding tendons and muscles. Progra''ing This is nothing more than normal autosuggestion or auto"training in the phase (hich is more potent in the phase than reality. 1 practitioner should repeat a desired goal silently or aloud and if possible should imagine e#periencing the desired result. For

e#ample if the aim is to get rid of depression a practitioner should attempt to recreate a happy mood in the phase e#periencing it to the fullest e#tent possible. 4imultaneously silent repetition of a goal (ith complete understanding and e#pectation that e&erything (ill be alright that e&erything is (onderful (ill undoubtedly produce the desired effect. 4seful e*perien es E&erything (ith useful properties in reality should be e#perienced as useful in the phase since the body (ill react in practically the same manner. Useful e#periences may include e#ercising going to the gym ha&ing a massage taking mud or salt baths and e#periencing pleasant emotions. Psy hology Practicing phase"related techni2ues fa&orably affects the psychology because it offers ne( opportunities and e&okes ne( emotions. 6o(e&er there are specific applications of the phase that produce differing psychological effects. For e#ample it is possible to use the phase space as a bridge for dealing (ith phobias by facilitating a setting (here a practitioner may confront and deal (ith certain fears. 9arious comple#es may be defeated in a similar manner. The use of a (ell"kno(n techni2ue called re"&isiting FrecapitulationG (here a person re"e#periences ad&erse e&ents (hile trying to relate to them in a ne( (ay has been used successfully in the phase. #raining 1ny motor skills can be sharpened by using it in reality and in the phase because the algorithm of rapid physical action is generated at the le&el of interaction bet(een areas of the brain that correspond to muscle action. )n the phase (restlers may practice thro(s karate fighters may practice punches and kicks and gymnasts may practice acrobatics. 6a&ing enough time to practice these actions in the phase is another matter.

4NP9O?EN E//EC#S People often approach the practice of &arious phase states (ith deep"rooted misconceptions about (hat can actually be achie&ed through practice. E&erything listed in this section refers to these misconceptions. )t has not been pro&en that any of these things is impossibleJ ho(e&er actions should be based on pro&en and &erified methods in order to a&oid making mistakes and (asting time. Ehysical e#it' )f the first e#perience (ith the phase phenomenon happens by accident it is almost impossible not to interpret it as a real separation of the soul from the body I a physical e#it. This is ho( the initial phase e#perience really feels. .ith e#perience it becomes easily noticeable that certain things in reality do not match things in the phase like the placement of ob%ects or furniture in the house (here a phase is first encountered. 'o actual physical e#it from the body has e&er been pro&en through scientific e#perimentation and obser&ation. For e#ample in the phase it is not possible to fly around to locations in physical (orld although it may seem so the locations that are e#perienced are produced (ithin the mind. 'or is it possible to pinch someone in the phase and then to find a bruise on the person (hile in reality. Other &orlds' The phase space is similar to the physical (orld and a practitioner may be inclined to think that the soul has left the body. 4ometimes the phase takes on an absolutely unnatural form. 1s a result the practitioner may decide that a parallel (orld has been entered- the (orld beyond the astral plane mental space or the ether. 1lthough tra&el in the phase can lead to many places this does not mean that the phase allo(s tra&el through or use of actual alternate (orlds. The practitioner should be reasonable. 3evelop$ent of super-a"ilities' )t is partially correct to consider the practice of the phase as an e#trasensory ability since it is an actual de&elopment of e#tremely unusual skills that ha&e al(ays been considered mystical. Times ha&e changed and the phase should hardly be shuttled off to the esoteric obscure corners of kno(ledge. There e#ists an unpro&en theory that the practice of the phase can impart unusual abilities. .hile literature is full of references to this

effect these abilities ha&e not yet been pro&en by anyone. The same applies to intentionally de&eloping unusual abilities in the phase. Pes these may be trained (hile in the phase but this does not mean that training in the phase (ill yield the same results in the real (orld. Practice should not be for the sake of achie&ing super"abilities since there are many pro&en applications that do translate to reality in &aluable (ays. 5e realistic. 4SE O/ #7E P73SE B8 #7E DIS3B;ED .hile practicing the phase may still be &ie(ed by the ma%ority as entertainment or an element of self"de&elopment at best phase practice takes on a (hole ne( meaning for the physically disabled. For them the phase may be the only place (here the handicaps of reality dissol&e and disabled practitioners e#perience a range of possibility greater than the life e#perienced in reality. 1 blind person (ill see again in the phase e&en more clearly than seeing people do in reality. 4omeone (ho is paraly=ed (ill be able (alk run and also fly. 1 deaf person (ill hear the murmur of streams and the chirping of birds. For the disabled the phase practice is a chance to disco&er ne( incomparable (orlds free of physical limitation. 'aturally there are some nuances that must be understood. First for e#ample if a person (as born blind then there is the 2uestion as to (hether or not they (ould be able to see in the phase the same (ay ordinary people see. 6o(e&er this issue has not been fully studied and blind people should simply carry out their o(n independent research. 4econd some types of disabilities can negati&ely affect the practice of the phase states. For e#ample people (ho ha&e gone blind ha&e greater difficultly catching the intermediate state bet(een sleep and (akefulness since unlike seeing people they may a(aken (ithout opening their eyes to the perception of sound. Third a purely psychological disability plays an enormous negati&e role. Psychologically disabled people ha&e a (hole range of specific beliefs and attitudes that may present an obstacle for them.

.hate&er the indi&idual issues this particular area of phase applications re2uires additional study. )t deser&es significant attention because it is a &alid tool for the rehabilitation of the disabled. )t is (orkable uni2ue and e#tremely surprising in terms of the e#periences that it offers. #8PIC3; MIS#3=ES (7EN 4SING 3PP;IC3#IONS 1ttempting an applied use of the phase (ithout reaching a good depth. 7eepening must al(ays be performed before applications are attempted. 5eing so in&ol&ed in phase applications that !maintaining$ techni2ues are forgotten. Forgetting to consider ho( to breathe (hen tra&eling through Outer 4pace or under(ater (hich may lead to asphy#iation. ,oncentrating on a certain ob%ect (hile tra&eling through time instead of concentrating on time tra&el (hich should be the focus since it is the point of performing the applications. Forgetting techni2ues for !maintaining$ (hen animate ob%ects are encountered (hen these techni2ues must al(ays be kept in mind. 1n inability to o&ercome fear during contact (ith deceased people. This fear must be o&ercome once and it (ill ne&er resurface again. 0imiting desires (hile practicing the phase. There is no limit to desire (ithin the phase. 0imiting the performance of certain actions although there are no customary norms of beha&ior in the phase unless the practitioner decides upon specific limits. .hile looking for information in the phase attempting to obtain kno(ledge (hich clearly e#ceeds the scope of the subconscious mind. 1pplying the techni2ue of obtaining information from animate ob%ects (ithout kno(ing ho( to communicate (ith them.

 Forgetting to check the ability of an ob%ect to con&ey &alid kno(ledge. The probability of bad information is much higher if it is not &erified. Failing to &erify information in the phase before using it in reality. Forgetting to &erify serious information obtained in the phase in reality before using it. 9erification absolutely must be performed to a&oid using bad information in reality. 1 single attempt to influence the physiology through the phase. )n the ma%ority of cases results are gained through repeated effort. 1n attempt to cure some disease only using the phase (hereas it is compulsory to seek medical ad&ice. )nitially belie&ing that the phase is the e#it of the soul from the body (hile this is easily refuted in practice. ,oncentrating only on unpro&en applications despite all the e&idence out there that this is most likely a (aste of time.

E*er ises for Chapter 12

<uestions 1. .hat are the three basic applications of the phase/ +. 1re pro&en practical phase applications accessible to any practitioner/ 8. .hile in the phase is it possible to actually tra&el through 1frica/ :. )s it possible to (alk on the moon in the phase/ ;. )s it possible (hile in the phase to appear at the time of the EarthDs creation/ <. )n the phase is it possible to appear in the magical (orld behind the looking glass/ >. .hich relati&es can be met in the phase/ ?. )s it possible to meet and talk to your fa&orite actor in the phase/

@. .here can one reali=e any cherished dream/ 1A. ,an a practitioner appear in the computer game 3oo$/ 11. ,an a musician use the phase for creati&e purposes/ 1+. 7oes the practicing the phase influence a personDs imagination/ 18. .hat most probably go&erns the phase space/ 1:. .hat kind of information is obtainable in the phase/ 1;. .hile in the phase is it possible to find out (here the lost key to an apartment is located/ 1<. .hat kind of people can disco&er (here treasure is hidden in the phase/ 1>. 4hould any information obtained in the phase be construed as accurate/ 1?. 4hould information obtained in the phase be &erified after (aking up e&en if itDs already &erified in the phase/ 1@. 4hould obtaining information occur before deepening has been performed/ +A. To obtain information (hile using the animate ob%ects techni2ue (ho should be talked to if the goal is it to find out the thoughts of a boss at (ork/ +1. 6o( might information from an animate ob%ect be obtained/ ++. ,an an inscription on a (all be used as an inanimate source of information/ +8. )s it possible to use the episode techni2ue to learn (here one has lost the key to oneDs apartment/ +:. 4hould a doctor be consulted before trying to cure a disease through phase practice/ +;. 1re results from influencing physiology in the phase al(ays 1AAK guaranteed/ +<. .hat phase techni2ues might be used to influence the bodies of other people/ +>. )s it possible to obtain information that can be used to influence the body and its functions/ +?. )s it possible to take a (ell"kno(n painkiller in the phase and feel its effects on e#it/ +@. )s it possible to use autosuggestion in the phase/

8A. ,an athletes use the phase to de&elop their skills/ 81. )s it realistic to e#pect to the soul (ill e#it the body (hile practicing the phase/ 8+. )s it possible to enter a parallel uni&erse through the phase/ 88. 4hould a practitioner hope to de&elop super"abilities in the phase/ #as!s 1. 9isit the Pyramids of 3i=a in the phase. Meet your fa&orite singer and tra&el to your dream house. +. .hile in the phase find a (ise person (ho is an authority on matters of the phase and learn from them (hat entrance techni2ues (ill best suit your practice. 8. Try to percei&e heat throughout the entire body by translocation to a sauna or through auto"suggestion. :. 0earn to mo&e ob%ects by simply staring at them in the phase and appreciate the e#tent to (hich this skill is reflected in reality.

Part III 3u*iliary Infor'ation

Chapter 11 4seful #ips

3 P93GM3#IC 3PP9O3C7 The only sure (ay to get practice (ithout unnecessarily (asting time is to ha&e a pragmatic and rational approach to the nature and possibilities of the phase phenomenon. The ma%ority of a&ailable information regarding dissociati&e phenomena is inaccurate. This becomes ob&ious during initial entries into the phase. This is (hy practice should begin from the perspecti&e of a clean slate using a logical bearing in thinkingeverything not confir$ed "y personal e#perience should "e ta+en &ith a grain of salt( This means only personal e#perience should be taken seriously not the e#perience of ac2uaintances authors teachers blogs or forums. To err is humanJ thus it is also human to pass on errors. 1s a result many parado#ical old (i&esD tales concerning the phase phenomenon ha&e become accepted a priori. 'ot e&erything (ritten in esoteric literature should be thro(n out. 4ome things may possibly be dra(n from it. 1fter reading such literature a practitioner should not assume that the ne( kno(ledge is a uni&ersal truth. For a house to stand firm it needs a solid foundation. The only (ay to build a good foundation phase practice is to approach the phenomenon in a do(n"to"earth manner from a scientific perspecti&e discounting any purported supernatural phenomena. Once a solid foundation has been established e&eryone has the right to build their o(n truth on it.

INDEPENDEN# 3N3;8SIS )f a practitioner is only interested in ha&ing phase e#periences then the simple treatment of this guidebook and other materials may suffice. 6o(e&er if a practitioner (ants to achie&e the best results ample focus must be gi&en to indi&idual thought and formation of opinion based on personal analysis. Until all 2uestions are ans(ered through a search for ans(ers in &arious sources of information no real progress should be e#pected. Many things cannot be described or e#plained. The resolution of many issues (ill al(ays remain up to indi&idual %udgment and understanding. Finding all of the ans(ers is impossible. Moreo&er trying to possess all of the ans(ers is a serious inhibitor to real progress because the practitioner (ould ha&e to digress into dubious literature and con&ersation aside from real formati&e practice. The ad&ice and e#periences of others may lead to error. )n no case should there be any authorities or unachie&able ideals. 1 logical e&en skeptical approach should be taken during research and practice. The goal of this guidebook is to pro&ide the reader (ith linear factual information sufficient for the de&elopment of independent analysis. Each time a practitioner encounters some incomprehensible phenomenon or problem (hen performing phase techni2ues an independent analysis of the phenomenon should be formed before looking else(here for the cause. )f a seeker looks for ans(ers outside of personal reasoning there is a high risk of assimilating and acting upon a fallacy. Many practitioners are not (illing to analy=e personal successes and failures and instead search all sorts of books (hich often contradict one another and using a hodge"podge of e#traneous un&erified information can only lead one to further and 2uite infectious fallacy. 3PP9O3C7 #O ;I#E93#49E

0iterature of e&ery sort has al(ays been the main &ehicle for disseminating information about the phase state. The phase phenomenon is referred to by other terms- astral pro%ection out"of" body tra&el or lucid dreaming. )n addition to disseminating information many books are often &ehicles for disseminating fallacies. This is easy to recogni=e (hen researching se&eral such books and comparing described e&ents and theories. The information is more often than not contradictory and based on opinions that ha&e ne&er been &erified by anyone including the authors. The result is a mass of speculation that has no bearing on reality nearly al(ays accompanied by a false certainty about the sub%ect matter. 6o(e&er unlike the real (orld the phase is not a place (here one can belie&e oneDs eyes or feelings. The phasesD appearance and 2ualities depend &ery much on the person e#periencing it. For e#ample if a practitioner belie&es upon entering the phase the body (ill be lying nearby on the bed then it (ill al(ays be there. )f a practitioner belie&es that the percei&ed body should al(ays be tethered to the physical body then in the practitioner (ill al(ays see and e&en feel a tether in the phase. This is a simple case of e#pectations becoming reality. 4imilarly someone (ho has entered the phase by accident and thinks that the time of death has arri&ed may see angels and a tunnel (ith a light at the end. )f someone is e#tremely religious there may be a perception that something holy e&en 3od has appeared. )f entry to the phase is construed as a result of being abducted by aliens then that is e#actly (hat (ill happen. This (ould all be 2uite funny if it (ere not actually encountered. .hen it occurs the only thing left to do is to belie&e. To belie&e to tell others about it and (rite books about it... There are authors (ho impart no illusions but it is often difficult for a no&ice to separate the truth from illusion or open fabrication (hich is (hy a skeptical approach to the contents of any book is (arranted. The only truth con&eyed in any book is that (hich has been &erified by personal e#perience. The rest should simply be noted and possibly taken into consideration.

)n conclusion books should be studied to disco&er techni2ue" related information that allo(s a practitioner to enter the phase and control the e#perience. This is the only point of intersection among all beliefs and theories. P93C#ICE EN?I9ONMEN# 4ince techni2ues used to enter the phase are associated (ith a specific type of mental operation it is necessary to create comfortable conditions so that e#ternal distracters are kept to a minimum. 1 room should neither be too cold or too hot nor too bright. Performing techni2ues at a comfortable temperature in a darkened room or (hile (earing a sleeping mask are (ays to promote unhindered practice. )nterfering noises are often also ma%or distracters and isolation from such noises is necessary to successful practice. )t is often sufficient to turn off the phone and close doors and (indo(s. )f this does not help or if it is e#tremely loud outside the (indo( one can use standard earmuffs. )t is also helpful to gi&e ad&ance notice to people so that they are not alarmed. )t is also preferable that no one is in the bed (ith the practitioner. Most often domestic animals interfere (ith the performance of techni2ues (hich is (hy they should be fed beforehand and kept out of the room (here direct or indirect techni2ues are practiced. #3;=ING (I#7 ;I=E-MINDED PEOP;E 3reat benefit is deri&ed by discussing personal e#periences (ith other practitioners. This leads to an e#change of information ne( kno(ledge and mutual help concerning certain problems and issues. The greatest effect comes through communication in person and not solely through mail forums and blogs. Meeting face"to"face (ith like"minded people promotes camaraderie and a useful kno(ledgebase to consider during indi&idual practice.

7ue to the fact that kno(ledge of the phenomenon is underde&eloped difficulties may arise in finding someone to talk to. This can be sol&ed by personally sharing phase e#periences (ith friends and family members regardless of (hether they are fello( practitioners. )t is e&en better to pass on training literature like this guidebook. The (ebsite www.obe4u.com also has a discussion forum de&oted to the phase making it possible to obtain and e#change a large amount of information. The site also has the contact information for the coordinators of Phase Practitioner ,lubs all around the (orld (hich is a non"commercial association of enthusiasts (ho meet to e#change and discuss e#periences. #7E 9IG7# (38 #O =EEP 3 GO49N3; Beeping a %ournal can be of much help (hile learning and practicing the phase. .hen properly kept a %ournal can help a practitioner to de&elop an analysis that (ill increase the 2uality of phase e#periences. 5y and large keeping a %ournal helps to iron out a sporadic practice turning it into a structured discipline that can be mastered. 1n effecti&e diary should contain a massi&e amount of indicators that allo( a statistical study to unco&er patterns. )t is essential that each entry include the date time of day or night a detailed account of entries into the phase and phase e#periences. 7escriptions of mistakes and a plan of action for the ne#t phase should also be recorded. 7uring the no&ice stages of practice e&en noting unsuccessful entry attempts is beneficial. 0ater on only successful phase e#periences may be recorded. 6ere is an e#ample of a proper %ournal entryDataC 2#perience /o( 12 January 6th, 2 H 2'88 EM

E*perien eC - &o+e up early in the $orning( %fter e#ercising, - too+ a sho&er and ate "rea+fast( - &atched TF and read "oo+s until lunch( - laid do&n for a nap at 1 EM, right after lunch( - felt li+e perfor$ing indirect techni4ues, and affir$ed this intention( &o+e up the first ti$e to $ove$ent, "ut after trying to e$ploy forced falling asleep Bin order to negate the effects of the $ove$ent), - fell asleep( - &o+e up the second ti$e &ithout $ove$ent and tried to roll out( This didn.t &or+ and - tried levitating and getting up( %fter that, - $oved on to phanto$ &iggling( Move$ent occurred in $y right hand( %fter doing this for several seconds, - decided to try listening in( Sounds started, "ut - &as una"le to $a+e the$ louder( 0o&ever, i$ages appeared "efore $y eyes and - started to vie& the$( %fter they "eca$e realistic, - decided to try rolling out and it &or+ed &ithout a hitch( My vision &as di$, as if through a veil( But then, the rest of the sensations - felt reached the verge of reality( This is &hen - &ent to the &indo&( For so$e reason, it &as su$$er outside, and not &inter( There &as a red fire-truc+ outside the &indo&( There &ere really lo& clouds in the s+y( The sun &as a"ove the$( /e#t, everything 4uic+ly faded a&ay and - found $yself "ac+ in $y "ody( Then, - got up and loo+ed at the ti$e( -t &as 2'16 EM( Mista!esC 1( 5hen the phanto$ &iggling &or+ed, - should have aggressively tried to increase the range of $ove$ent, and not si$ply done &iggling, let alone change to another techni4ue( %fter all, if &iggling occurs, the phase can al&ays "e entered( 2( The sa$e &ith the sounds( - had no great desire to a$plify sounds or even listen in( 2verything &as done lac+adaisically( 8( - should have started &ith deepening and not actions, as visual sensations &ere not vivid( I( - should have e$ployed

techni4ues for $aintaining( 6( Jou can.t loo+ do&n for long &ithout si$ultaneously using techni4ues for $aintaining, yet too+ in everything outside the &indo& and in the s+y( K( forgot a"out the plan of action( L( - should have tried again to enter the phase( Plan of a tion for ne*t ti'eC 1( 3efinitely deepen the phase as $uch as possi"le( 2( should try to go through a &all( 8( Translocate to $y %untie in /e& Jor+( I( Translocate to the Statue of Mi"erty and e#a$ine her cro&n( 6( Try to conduct the e#peri$ent of putting $y hand into $y head(

Chapter 1" Pra titioners5 E*perien es

#7E SIGNI/IC3NCE O/ O#7E9 PEOP;E5S EEPE9IENCES The ability to analy=e the e#periences of others can be a great supplement to personal training. This allo(s a practitioner to re&ie( and think through situations that ha&e not yet been personally encountered. The more a practitioner analyses the e#periences of other practitioners fe(er mistakes (ill be made during indi&idual practice. Reading the e#periences contained in this section (ill shed much light on proper phase practice. The actions that these practitioners took to achie&e results (ill be subconsciously retained by the readerDs memory. 0ater these actions may reproduce similar circumstances in the phase affording &aluable opportunities to respond using proper actions. 1t the beginning stages of practice many practitioners lack in real descriptions of phase e#periences (hile techni2ue"related kno(ledge abounds. Techni2ues can be conceptuali=ed in many different (ays (hile descriptions of their application are much more demonstrati&e. Thus many practitioners ha&e no idea about ho( genuine practice transpires. The e#periences described in this section are useful " e&en from a psychological point of &ie(. E&en if a person belie&es that the phase phenomenon e#ists it may be construed as e#tremely difficult or personally impossible. 1fter learning about other peopleDs e#periences a person (ill reali=e that these practitioners ha&e been

able to enter the phase (ithout any complicated or incomprehensible techni2ues. The reader (ill understand that the key is to take right actions at the right moment trying to master the phase (ith calmness and confidence. .hile re&ie(ing and analy=ing other peopleDs e#periences in this section the reader should remember that these e#periences are based on personal beliefs about the phenomenon (hich is (hy occult terminology and notions may be encountered. 6o(e&er such aspects of the descriptions are not important. Focus should be gi&en to techni2ue"related actions described in the accounts. The reader should also take into account that some nuances Flike e#periential realismG are not al(ays clear in the te#t and that it is not al(ays possible to determine (hy certain e&ents occurred in the phase e#periences described here. 1ll of the follo(ing descriptions belong to real people (ho either related the accounts orally (rote them do(n during classes at the 4chool of Out"of"5ody Tra&el submitted them &ia email or posted them on the forum at www.obe4u.com. Though the total number of recorded &erifiable phase descriptions e#ceeds one thousand only se&eral cases that are illustrati&e and useful for de&eloping analysis ha&e been selected. Primarily these are descriptions of the practitionersD initial phase e#periences (hich are most rele&ant to ne( practitioners. The large number of mistakes made by almost e&ery practitioner regardless of their le&el of e#perience should not be taken too seriously (hile reading the comments. 1ctually it is a rare occasion that the phase is e#perienced (ithout any techni2ue"related errors. E&erybody makes mistakes. E#periments are listed in ascending order of 2uality and number of properly performed actions. 1ccounts ha&e been published (ith the permission of the authors.

3N3;8SIS O/ SE;EC#ED P93C#I#IONE9SI EEPE9IENCES NoD 1 Boris Pronya!in Copy6riterD =ie>J 4!raine - &o+e up in the >correct? state( - i$$ediately felt vi"rations, and "efore - had ti$e to ti$e to thin+ a"out anything, - &as +noc+ed out of $y "ody "y a strong +ic+( - started falling( - had no vision, the floor &as gone( Mi+e a nose-diving airplane, - &as in a free-fall( +ept dropping faster and faster( - started to feel that - &as losing control( The only thing - could do &as increase the speed &ith &hich - fell, all of the &ays that occurred to $e to try $aintain the phase that - atte$pted at that $o$ent only lo&ered $y degree of a&areness( Touching did not do anything for $e, as - &as 1ust an une$"odied spirit in a co$plete vacuu$( Fision &as also $issing( started to panic due to the i$$inent foul( But the acceleration of the fall did not help either, and - &as flying and &aiting for the $o$ent &hen - &ould "e thro&n out into the drea$ &orld( %nd - dropped li+e this until - fell asleep( <uestionsC 7id 5oris describe a direct or indirect techni2ue/ .hat could he ha&e done if no spontaneous separation had occurred/ 6o( could 5oris ha&e more correctly used deepening techni2ues/ .hy (asnEt 5oris thro(n into a phase episode/ .hy did he fall asleep/ 3ns6ers and Co''entsC 1n indirect techni2ue (as employed. )f spontaneous separation had not occurred 5oris could ha&e tried to separate on his o(n. )f an attempt to separate had failed it (ould be necessary to implement indirect techni2ues by intensifying the &ibrations and then try once again to separate. )n order to deepen and mean(hile reach a destination (hile falling 5oris should ha&e applied translocation techni2ues and upon reaching a location continued to deepen by means of sensory amplification. For e#ample he could ha&e applied the techni2ue of translocation by teleportation (ith his eyes closed or simply tried to catch sight of his hands through the darkness (hich also (ould ha&e induced an e#it.

5oris also did not pay any attention to the roar in his ears. )t could ha&e been used for the techni2ue of listening in (hich (ould ha&e helped him to deepen and maintain. The lack of a set aim to land some(here resulted in his endless fall though it does not al(ays happen this (ay. 5oris fell asleep due to his passi&ity and also because he forgot that falling asleep (as a possibility though he did remember about the possibility of an inad&ertent return to reality Fa foulG. NoD " 3le*ei Ba!hare> EngineerD So hiJ 9ussia This &as the first ti$e that - $anaged to "eco$e conscious &hile drea$ing( Before falling asleep, - concentrated on the dar+ness "efore $y eyes and tried to re$ain consciousness as long as - could( %ll of a sudden, - drea$t that - &as levitating to the ceiling, &hich resulted in $y "eco$ing conscious that - &as drea$ing( My phanto$ "ody responded poorly to atte$pts to control it, and si$ply hovered "eneath the ceiling( There &ere t&o people sitting on the floor "elo&( They &ere loo+ing in $y direction, "ut it see$ed that they did not see $e( %t this point - &o+e up and felt so$e sort of tingling and itching in $y legs( <uestionsC .hat factors led to the entry into the phase through dream consciousness/ .hat needed to be done (hile ho&ering about beneath the ceiling/ .hy did the foul happen so fast/ .hat should ha&e been done immediately after returning to the body/ 3ns6ers and Co''entsC 7ream consciousness occurred due to the 1le#eiDs intent to concentrate on the space before his eyes and his desire to remain conscious for as long as possible. The process of becoming conscious (as caused by the sensation of flying (hile dreaming. Flying almost al(ays becomes an anchor for dream consciousness. )mmediately after the phase occurred 1le#ei should ha&e started deepening. )nstead he simply ho&ered about and obser&ed. .hile all the mo&ements may ha&e been difficult to perform they should ha&e ne&ertheless still been done &ery acti&ely. 1s a result lightness and a deepening of the phase (ould ha&e

ensued. 6is inad&ertent e#it from the phase happened due to passi&ity failure to deepen and non"compliance (ith the rules for maintaining the phase. E&en upon returning to his body 1le#ei should ha&e tried to separate again. NoD % D'itry Mar!o> 9adio Me hani D Mos o6J 9ussia My first ti$e &as the $ost terri"le event in $y life( - had never e#perienced such terror( -t happened in 3ece$"er, 1!! ( - &as falling asleep in $y "ed at ho$e( Suddenly, - heard so$eone enter $y roo$, "ut - did not pay attention to the >intruder?( Then, t&o fe$ale hands gra""ed $e fro$ "ehind, and &hile pressing $y "elly, started to lift $y "ody up( - distinctly felt thin fingers &ith long nails on $y "elly, "ut &as co$pletely paraly*ed and a"solutely una"le $ove any part of $y "ody or put up any +ind of resistance( - felt $y "ody go through the ceiling, "ut then &as pulled still higher and higher( - got scared that this could "e death( - &as afraid not so $uch of death as of the un+no&n( %ll of this happened so s&iftly that - found $yself unprepared for such a crossover( - started to pray( - as+ed ;od to help $e free $yself and go "ac+( - panic+ed( - can.t say ho& $any seconds $y forced levitation lasted or ho& high - &as lifted a"ove $y house, "ut the $o$ent ca$e &hen - instantly returned to $y "ed( <uestionsC .as this entry into the phase deliberate/ .hat kind of techni2ue led to the phase/ .hat is the name for the complete immobili=ation that 7mitry encountered/ .hat should he ha&e done in order to start mo&ing/ .hy did his body easily go through the ceiling/ .hy (as he able to stop this terrible e#perience by praying/ .hat could he ha&e done immediately upon returning to his body/ 3ns6ers and Co''entsC This phase e#perience (as spontaneous and falls under the category of direct techni2ues since there (as no significant lapse into sleep. The (hole e#perience (as accompanied by sleep paralysis (hich is (hy it (as difficult for 7mitry to do anything. )n order to mo&e in this type of situation it

(ould ha&e been necessary to intensify the phase state by using an indirect techni2ue or redouble efforts to mo&e.p 7mitryDs body (ent through the ceiling (ithout any difficulty because there (as no &ision and the phase itself had not been deepened other(ise this (ould not ha&e happened so easily. Praying and appealing to 3od helped in this case because praying facilitated a rela#ation of perceptions and an intention to go back to reality- t(o factors (hich are crucial during emergency return techni2ues. Upon returning to his body he could ha&e still tried to separate again though this (ould ha&e been easier said than done due to the fear associated (ith the first e#perience. NoD & I>an 8a!o>le> StudentD 3nt6erpJ Belgiu' - don.t +no& &hat &o+e $e up, "ut - +ne& right a&ay that so$ething &as out of order( - could not open $y eyes, and $y "ody &as al$ost 1ust as+ing to rise up( - understood &hat &as going on N all of this indicated that - &as having an out-of-"ody e#perience( The first thing - tried &as to lift $y left hand up, and it &or+ed( understood that this &as an astral hand, "ecause - could see through it( - $oved hastily and carefully to the other side of the "ed BThere &as a strange sensation in $y head at that ti$e)( - cal$ed do&n and tried to do so$ething again( - levitated a"out half a $eter a"ove the "ed( Fision ca$e "ac+ to $e right then and - sa& &hat appeared to "e $y roo$, "ut not e#actly it, as the rug on the floor &as of a different color pattern and the door &as closed for so$e reason( could not co$prehend &hy everything &as lit fro$ "ehind $y "ac+( Then, - loo+ed over $y left shoulder and sa& a s$all "right &hite "all "ehind $y shoulder "lade at a distance of H inches( -t &as lighting up the roo$ up( Then - tried to go through the door, "ut &as una"le to( Out of the fear that - &ould never return to $y real "ody, &o+e up in the everyday &orld( <uestionsC 7uring the beginning of his e#perience (hat phenomenon typical to the phase and a(akening did )&an encounter/ .hat kind of techni2ue direct or indirect led to the phase/ .hat

specific techni2ues (ere employed/ 6o( could the sensation of !the body %ust asking to rise up$ ha&e been used/ .hat should ha&e been done immediately (hen he reali=ed that it (as possible to raise his hand/ .hat should ha&e been the first actions taken after le&itation/ .hy (as it unnecessary to immediately try to go through the door/ .hat should ha&e been done (hen )&an returned to his body/ 7oes this practitioner ha&e a do(n"to"earth &ie( or an esoteric &ie( of the nature of this phenomenon/ 3ns6ers and Co''entsC Upon a(akening in a state of sleep paralysis )&an understood that he could use this opportunity for the phase and immediately started attempts to separate (ithout employing techni2ues for creating the state as they (ould ha&e been superfluous. This (as an indirect techni2ue by nature. 6e could ha&e follo(ed his impulse to le&itate from the &ery beginning instead of mo&ing his hands. 1fter his hand started to mo&e he could ha&e stood up or separated. )nstead )&an simply rolled o&er and calmed do(n for an instant although doing so is strongly discouraged and is a (aste of the progress made up to this point. Then after starting to le&itate he should ha&e first of all assumed a position distinct from that of his real body stood up on the floor and immediately started deepening. )nstead he di&erted his attention to the light source and an attempt to go through the door. E&en if e&erything had been done correctly from the beginning there (ould ha&e been no reason to attempt to go through the door. )&an could ha&e simply opened it. The skill of going through ob%ects should be learned after first fine"tuning the ability to deepen and maintain the phase. There (as no reason to return out of fear but e&en a return to the body another immediate attempt at separating (ould most likely ha&e been successful. The use of the term of !astral hand$ indicates that the practitioner harbors esoteric &ie(s on the sub%ect.

NoD ) Natalya =oHheno>a EngineerD Sh hel!o>oJ 9ussia 5hen - &as a"out 1L or 1H years old, - read so$e esoteric articles on astral pro1ection( They see$ed 4uite interesting to $e, "ut no $ore than a curiosity N - did not particularly "elieve in such things( One evening, - &ent to "ed as usual( - &o+e up in the $iddle of the night, "ut &as una"le to $ove $y "ody and there &as a loud noise in $y head( 0aving "een re$inded of those articles, - si$ply tried to levitate and - $anaged to do so, as if through $y forehead so$eho&( The sensation of flying &as very realistic, to $y great surprise( The first thought that occurred to $e &as, O5o&, these astral guys &eren.t lying,? - hovered a"ove $y "ody for so$e ti$e in the dar+( - thought of vision, and it started to appear( - then fle& to&ards the &indo&, and upon turning around in to face $y "ody, sa& it in its proper place( - decided to fly "ac+ to it and touch it( 5hen - finally po+ed it, it suc+ed $y "ac+ into it, causing a 4uite strange sensation( <uestionsC .hat type of techni2ue did 'atalya use/ .hat (ould she ha&e needed to do if her attempt at le&itating had been unsuccessful/ .hy (as the phase short"li&ed/ .hat should she ha&e done upon returning to her body/ .hy did she use the term !astral$/ .ere the articles about astral pro%ection of any significant help/ 3ns6ers and Co''entsC Upon a(akening in a state of a sleep paralysis 'atalya stumbled upon the idea of employing indirect techni2ues. 4he managed to separate immediately but if sheDd encountered problems in doing so she could ha&e started the techni2ue of listening in to the !noise$ in her head. The phase (as short"li&ed due to a lack of acti&ity and failure to perform deepening and !maintaining$ techni2ues. 1fter returning to her body she should ha&e tried to immediately separate. 'atalya holds esoteric &ie(s on the nature of the phase phenomenon (hich is (hy she uses such terminology for it. 6o(e&er the articles helped her to perform the right actions at the right moment.

No + 3le*ander /ur'en!o> StudentD Saint Peters0urgJ 9ussia - &o+e up at early in the night after so$e difficulties &ith falling asleep( Blurred i$ages started to float "efore $y eyes and - reali*ed that - could enter the phase( - started to discard unnecessary i$ages, and after getting ahold of one of the$, - e$erged in so$e +ind of a yello& corridor( The level of general realness and a&areness of the e#perience &as a"out H 7 to ! 7 of that of reality( - re$e$"ered a"out the $ethods for deepening, &hich is &hy - started to loo+ at everything going on around $e, "ut this did not yield any serious results( - started to touch $yself, "ut all sensation see$ed so$e&hat da$pened( - reali*ed that - &as losing a&areness( - ca$e round, "ut nevertheless fell asleep in a"out 2 seconds( <uestionsC )s it possible to call the techni2ue used in this description a direct techni2ue/ .hat specific techni2ue for creating the phase (as employed/ .hich separation techni2ue did 1le#ander use/ .hat could ha&e been the reason for the !dampened sensation$ and inability to deepen/ .hat caused him to fall asleep/ 3ns6ers and Co''entsC The techni2ue employed cannot be considered a direct one though it (as used at the beginning of the night. 1s a matter of fact it appears that the preliminary lapse of consciousness into sleep (as significant. )f such preliminary sleep had lasted only se&eral minutes the techni2ue could ha&e been considered partially direct. The techni2ue for obser&ing images (as employed correctly because the images appeared on their o(n. 1le#ander did not employ any techni2ues for separation as the obser&ing images techni2ue often brings the obser&er into the obser&ed image or some other (orld (hich is e#actly (hat happened here. Most likely the (eakness of the phase (as due to meager le&els of acti&ity and moti&ation (hich (ere caused by the fact that it (as early in the night. The practitioner fell asleep because he failed to deepen sufficiently and not keep from falling asleep. 3eneral acti&ity (as also &ery lo(. The bodyDs desire to fall asleep played a

ma%or role in the process. 1le#ander had after all been ha&ing problems sleeping. NoD , 9o'an 9euto> Syste' 3d'inistratorD Sa'araJ 9ussia Truly, the $ost interesting things al$ost al&ays happen une#pectedly( %fter a sufficiently long "rea+ in $y atte$pts to go to the other &orld, tonight - decided to try it again( - thre& in the to&el after yet another unsuccessful atte$pt, rolled to $y other side, and decided to si$ply get a good night.s sleep( - do not +no& e#actly ho& $uch ti$e passed &hile - lay do&n and thought a"out &hat - &as still doing &rong &hile o"serving interesting i$ages that $y i$agination &as dra&ing( But at one fine $o$ent, - suddenly felt the pheno$enon that is co$$only referred to as vi"rations( - started to intensify the$ B- should add that the feeling is indescri"a"le), "ut - could not levitate, though - really &anted to ta+e a loo+ at $yself fro$ the outside( - decided to si$ply stand up, and that.s &hen it all "eca$e $ost interesting, The entire process of transitioning fro$ a hori*ontal position to a vertical one &as acco$panied "y increasingly palpa"le vi"rations and a louder and louder roaring sound in $y head( The sensation &as the sa$e as that e#perienced after going to "ed after not having slept for 2I hours and then "eing suddenly roused "y so$e"ody' $y head spun, everything started crac+ling inside of it, and - &as a"out to lose consciousness( Then, a flic+ering picture started to appear( -t sta"ili*ed after one or t&o seconds, the roaring in $y head died do&n, and - reali*ed that - &as sitting on $y "ed( - &as in $y apart$ent, thought it &as noticea"ly altered( My roo$ see$ed $ore or less the sa$e, though the interior &as indeed different upon detailed e#a$ination( For e#a$ple, $y $o"ile phone, &hich is al&ays &ithin a reach, &as so$eho& an older and different $odel( -t turned out to "e the first o"1ect that - tested, as - suddenly &anted very $uch to find out &hat ti$e it &as and chec+ &hich day of the $onth it &as( - distinctly felt the phone in $y hand, "ut upon

atte$pting to concentrate on and loo+ at the display, - &as thro&n "ac+ into the reality( - i$$ediately cli$"ed "ac+ out of $y "ody and decided to si$ply pace around the apart$ent &hile trying to re$e$"er &hat - could e#peri$ent on( - tried to con1ure an o"1ect, "ut that didn.t &or+ and resulted in so$e $ental activity( This caused the phase to fade and $y "eing thro&n "ac+ into reality( -n total, there &ere a"out five successive entries into the phase that lasted for 2 to 8 $inutes each( The e#periences &ere not sta"le at all, &hich is &hy - &as e#a$ining $y surroundings in a hurry, al&ays trying to get ahold of anything - could get $y hand on( 0o&ever, there &ere a good a$ount of i$pressions, considering that it &as $y first entry( <uestionsC .hat type of techni2ue did Roman use to enter the phase/ .hat (ere the key precursors of the phase/ .hich separation techni2ue (as used/ )f Roman had failed to completely separate (hat techni2ue besides &ibrations should he ha&e considered/ .hat is the most likely reason for all of the fouls/ .hich single action allo(ed the practitioner to make the phase fi&e times longer/ 3ns6ers and Co''entsC The phase (as entered through a direct techni2ue (ith the comfortable position that Roman (as lying in being the main catalyst. 1s long as Roman (as lying in an uncomfortable position his mind (as unable to completely turn off physical perception and this (as most likely the reason (hy there (ere no short lapses in dreaming. )f Roman (ere still unable to separate (hen using the techni2ue of standing up or any other techni2ue besides intensifying the &ibrations he could ha&e tried listening in as there (as some noise. )nstead of using his first phase e#perience to (ork on mastering the basic skills of deepening and maintaining Roman immediately indulged in comple# e#periments (hich is (hy his multiple entries (ithin the same phase (ere brief of poor 2uality and not used effecti&ely. 5ut this is all typical during initial e#periences and a lot (as still accomplished especially considering that a direct techni2ue (as used. The relati&e length of the phase (as achie&ed mainly thanks to complying (ith the single (ay to maintain the phase I repeated separation (hich Roman managed to do fi&e times.

NoD 3le*ander Dyren!o> StudentD Mos o6J 9ussia My first entry happened at night( - &as lying in "ed and thin+ing a"out the phase, as - had "een una"le to fall asleep for a &hile( do*ed off for a $o$ent and then a&o+e again, this ti$e already in the proper state, and then easily rolled out B$ore or less unconsciously and refle#ively)( - &ent deeper "y $eans of touching and then falling headfirst( -t is a pity that -.ve already forgotten a lot of the e#perience, "ut - do re$e$"er that after deepening - fell right do&n onto the yard of $y grand$other.s house, "ut then lost consciousness, and so - returned into $y "ody and rolled out of it several ti$es( - &as una"le to sharpen all $y senses' 5hen deepened one sense Btouch, for e#a$ple), another Bi(e( sight) &ould fade a&ay( %fter that, - have a gap in $y $e$ory concerning $y travels Bconsciousness and lucidity &ere &ea+, and - fell asleep and >resurfaced? several ti$es), "ut - re$e$"er having "een to a lot of places( 0ereAs ho& the episode ended' - dove headfirst into &ater fro$ a high "oard Bafter first having deepened a "it), and then $y sense of touch gre& sharper' - felt >&ater? and hit $y head against a very soft >"otto$(? - resu$ed the interrupted fall through &illpo&er, "ut then it occurred to $e that $y grand$other &anted to &a+e $e up( My level of a&areness &as not 4uite ade4uate, as it did not occur to $e that - &as actually sleeping in a dor$itory, and not at $y grand$otherAs house( That.s &hy - decided that - needed to return to $y "ody( % sharp fall occurred right after that thought, and &as follo&ed "y sensations si$ilar to those one e#periences &hen hungover( <uestionsC .as a direct or indirect techni2ue applied/ .hat made the implementation of the techni2ue successful/ .hy (as 1le#ander e%ected into his grandmotherEs yard/ .hile deepening ho( could the problem of the senses being enhanced only one at a time ha&e been sol&ed/ .hy did the practitioner ha&e gaps in his memory/ .hat (ere the main problems associated (ith maintaining the phase/

3ns6ers and Co''entsC 7espite the brief lapse in consciousness the techni2ue used (as a direct one and that &ery lapse facilitated the immediate emergence of the necessary state e&en though this (as 1le#anderDs first e#perience. The e%ection into his grandmotherEs yard (as spontaneous and (as most likely caused by some preceding thoughts about the yard or being in a habit of going there. Une#pected translocation often occurs (hen deepening (hile falling headfirst. Ouite possibly in order to a&oid ha&ing the senses of sight and touch enhance only one at a time he should ha&e simultaneously applied the techni2ues of touching and looking out. 1s for maintaining the phase there (ere three main problems that (ere also direct causes of the gaps in 1le#anderEs memory- little depth lack of a clear plan of action and non"compliance (ith the rules for maintaining the phase F(ith the e#ception of multiple entries after return to the bodyG. NoD . S>yatosla> Barano> StudentD Per'J 9ussia - &o+e up on $y side( - didn.t feel li+e sleeping any$ore, "ut closed $y eyes any&ay( 5hen - lay do&n on $y "ac+, - i$$ediately felt the sensation that - &as a"out to fall fro$ the couch B- &as lying on the edge), and so$e +ind of lapse occurred, as if - &as "eing pulled so$e&here( - lay do&n once again, and this "u**ing started, and a green light appeared "efore $y eyes( - lay "ac+ even further, and $y eyelids started to flutter( - thought that - $ight fall fro$ the couch at that $o$ent, "ut then $y vision ca$e to $e, and - o"served that - &as already lying on the floor ne#t to the couch, - got up on $y feet and noticed that the roo$ &as >spinning? as if - &ere drun+, "ut everything 4uite 4uic+ly &ent "ac+ to nor$al( %t that very $o$ent, understood that this &as it, The phase itself, -n ecstasy, - forgot a"out all the techni4ues and &ent to loo+ a"out the roo$( 2verything &as 1ust li+e in reality, "ut so$e things &ere out of place( - tried to levitate and "ent "ac+&ards, and &as so$eho& thrust outside( -t &as dus+ out there, and there &as a lot of

sno& on the ground( - &ent around the house and tried to levitate( &as a"le to soar up&ards, and sa& the hori*on and sunset( But then "egan to lose altitude( %fter having flo&n to the &indo& on the other side of the house, - &anted to go up to the roof, "ut then a foul occurred( -n a fraction of a second, - had the sensation that - &as >no&here?( But then, $y real eyes opened B&ith difficulty) and there &as once again the feeling of so$e sort of lapse( %&areness &as di$ during the phase, apparently due to not having gotten enough sleep( <uestionsC .hat kind of phase entrance techni2ue did 4&yatosla& use/ .hich specific techni2ue produced results/ .hich separation techni2ue (as employed/ )f separation (as unsuccessful (hich techni2ue should ha&e been immediately used/ .hich important actions did he not perform enough after entering the phase/ .hat should ha&e been done after the foul/ .hy (as a(areness dim during the phase/ 3ns6ers and Co''entaryC 1n indirect techni2ue (as employed. 'o phase state creation techni2ues (ere employed by 4&yatosla&. )nstead separation immediately (orked through rolling back(ards. )f separation (ere unsuccessful he should ha&e proceeded (ith obser&ing images (hich (ould ha&e been possible (ith the green light.
7eepening (as not immediately performed no effort (as made to maintain and there (as no appro#imation of a plan of actionJ ho(e&er this is not a crucial factor during initial

1nother attempt to enter the phase should ha&e been made upon returning to the body but this (as also forgotten. 1(areness (as dim and memory (as (eak during the phase because of the initial shallo(ness of the state (hich (as reflected in the perception of the surrounding and also the thought processes.
e#periences.

NoD 12 Oleg Sush hen!o Sports'anD Mos o6J 9ussia Mast night - spent a"out an hour developing the interplay of i$ages in $y $ind after - no left felt any feeling of +inesthetic sense( - &as lying on $y "ac+ in an unco$forta"le position( %fter sliding to&ards sleep for so$e ti$e, - felt slight vi"rations and echoes of

sounds fro$ the drea$ &orld, "ut the unco$forta"le position still hindered $e( -n the end, - thought the hec+ &ith it, and decided to lie do&n ho&ever &as co$forta"le, and turned over to lie on $y sto$ach( 3espite the fact that the $ove$ent upset the process, after a"out five $inutes the state "egan to return and "uild up( - &as a"le to get a little vi"ration this ti$e, although - &as una"le to a$plify it( - dre& a picture of $y +itchen in $y $ind, and "ecause the i$ages in that state &ere really vivid, strong, and realistic, after so$e ti$e understood that not only &ere $y attention and a&areness there, "ut so &ere $y "odily sensations( - &as 4uite surprised that the phase had "een so easy to fall in to Bthere &as no dou"t that this &as the phase)( - 1u$ped out through the &indo& and "egan to fly around the courtyard( %ctually, it &as the first ti$e that - had flo&n only upon a single $ental co$$and, &ithout any physical effort, as occurs during drea$s( The courtyard "ore only 1 7 si$ilarity to its reallife counterpart, "ut - &as not at all surprised "y this, and - si$ply en1oyed it as $uch as - could, as - &as a"le see and &as not i$$ediately thro&n out( But, after having loo+ed at and ta+en in the city, the thought of &hether or not this &as the phase and not 1ust a lucid drea$ occurred( - &as so conscious in the drea$ that - &as a"le to +no& a"out and co$prehend such ter$s, and differentiate "et&een the$ - can you i$agineG, - have to add that - gave little attention to $y $e$ory, so - can.t say ho& $uch of $y >selfa&areness? &as there, "ut - &as a&are enough to "e a"le to differentiate "et&een the phase and a lucid drea$ Bor at least thin+ a"out the difference)( - even &ent and as+ed people around if it &as the phase or a lucid drea$( Sounds funny, doesnAt itG The funniest thing &as that they ans&ered that it &as a different &orld, and they refused to discuss the topic any further &ith $e( Then, - decided to not get $y $ind all $i#ed up and 1ust go &ith the plot, &hich turned out to "e 4uite long and uninterrupted, - recalled a $o$ent fro$ the day "efore ho& - had lain do&n and induced the phase &hile lying on $y "ac+, and ho& - had turned over and flo&n a&ay( - recalled all this periodically during the course of the phase, and reali*ed that -

should try to as+ a"out &hat had "een going on &ith $e on the foru$ later( Then, later in the phase, - found $yself in a "ase$ent( %s there &as 1ust a really nasty s$ell there, - decided that - had already had enough and that it &as ti$e to go "ac+( That happened even $ore easily, as soon as - thought a"out going "ac+, a vi"ration as light as a "ree*e &ent through $e and then - &as "ac+ in $y "ody &ith full a&areness and a &ell-rested "ody and $ind( - &as co$pletely refreshed, %nd that.s despite the fact that - re$e$"er everything, every second of the drea$, fro$ the $o$ent - started flying, <uestionsC .hich type of techni2ue helped Oleg enter the phase/ .hat initially made it harder for him to enter the phase and could this ha&e had a positi&e effect on later results/ .hat can be said of techni2ues related to &ibrations in the conte#t of OlegEs entry into the phase/ .hich specific techni2ue brought him into the phase/ .hich initial actions should ha&e been taken upon entry into the phase/ .hat (as lacking that could ha&e lead to producti&e use of the phase/ .as it (orth(hile to immediately translocate by %umping through the (indo(/ .hat (as the cause of reflection on (hether the e#perience (as the phase or a conscious dream/ .as it beneficial to try to offhandedly learn from ob%ects (hat type of state this (as/ .hy did the desire to return back to the body arise and (hat could ha&e caused it/ 3ns6ers and Co''entaryC Oleg entered the phase using a direct techni2ue. 6e (as initially unable to enter due to the uncomfortable position that he had assumed although lapses in consciousness into short dreams did occur. 'e&ertheless the initially unsuccessful techni2ue still ended in a positi&e final outcome because the state that Oleg (as in (as close to the phase. 6o(e&er attention should not ha&e been gi&en to &ibration amplification techni2ues especially straining the brain and straining the body (ithout using muscles as they can be detrimental during direct techni2ues. The techni2ue of &isuali=ation (as used immediately before entering the phase instead of obser&ing images (hich is used more often. Oleg deliberately con%ured the obser&ed images instead of searching for them in front of himself (hich is (here the difference

bet(een the techni2ues lies. 6o(e&er he did not perform deepening upon entering the phase. 1dditionally he had no clear plan of action to ensure that the phase (ould be producti&e 4tarting to translocate by %umping through (indo(s should only be done by those (ith a certain amount of e#perience since beginners sometimes percei&e reality to be the phase or the phase to be reality. The reason for the reflection on the nature of the phenomenon (as due to terminological confusion (hich is 2uite (idespread. )f a practitioner is a(are but does not feel the body as in the physical (orld then it can be assumed that the phase has been entered. This is (hy there (as no reason to in2uire about this among animate ob%ects. 7eliberately returning to the body (as a big mistake. There (as no reason to thro( a(ay an opportunity to tra&el and use the phase. 5eginners are not often afforded such an opportunity. The reason for the return to the body in this case is most likely found in the absence of a plan of action and lack of clear understanding of ho( the phase might be used for practical aims. NoD 11 3le*ander ;ele!o> Co'puter Progra''erD Saint Peters0urgJ 9ussia - tried all night to use the %stral :atapult that cues you &hen you.re drea$ing, "ut - gave up on the idea after several unsuccessful a&a+enings and si$ply fell asleep( 5hen -A$ drea$ing - usually $ove "y ta+ing great leaps, $uch further than a +angaroo, a"out 1 -8 yards( This happens regularly in $y drea$s, and - usually i$$ediately reali*e that -A$ in a drea$( 3uring one of the leaps, reali*ed &hile air"orne that - &as drea$ing and also reali*ed that &as a"le to land in a s$all dirty pond( %s e#pected, - landed right in the pond and &ent deep under the &ater( %nd at that very $o$ent, found $yself in the stencil, &ith $y hands and head half stuc+ in it( - got a little nervous that this atte$pt &ould also "e unsuccessful, and so - i$$ediately tried to separate fro$ $y "ody( - &as una"le to get $y head or hands out, and for the first ti$e - tried to turn around round $y a#is and $anaged to get out( Then - either slipped do&n or fell fro$ the "ed, "ut - did not feel any pain( - cra&led for 1-2 $eters

and then felt that - could go "ac+( - started to touch the rug and so$e other thing, though - don.t +no& e#actly &hat it &as as it &as dar+, and, lo and "ehold' &ithin 2 -8 seconds - pro"a"ly felt &hat s$all +ittens feel &hen their eyes open for the first ti$e( 2verything &as foggy and "lurry at first, "ut then a picture started to appear, the roo$ filled &ith light, and colors "eca$e "right and vivid( - tried very hard to restrain $y e#cite$ent, and, to $y surprise, &as a"le to( - &al+ed around $y apart$ent thin+ing a"out &hat - should do( Reali*ing that - did not have that $uch ti$e, - decided to tal+ to an elderly $an &ho &ould ans&er $y 4uestions( - decided that there &ould "e an o$niscient elderly $an "ehind the apart$entAs front door, &hich - &as a"out to open( %nd there he &as, half-"ald, a"out K years old, in a grey coat &aiting for $e( - as+ed hi$ the 4uestion, >5hat should - do to get into the phase $ore oftenG? But he started to tell $e a"out ho& he &as raped as a child( %nd to "e $ore precise, this &as already not an elderly $an, "ut an elderly &o$an( &as not very interested in hearing her story, thus - tried to $ove a&ay fro$ her, suggesting that &e could tal+ later( But the elderly &o$an &as persistent, and - did not &ant to offend her, "ecause thought that this &as an unusual drea$ &ith its o&n set of rules, and na$ely that once you have as+ed an old &o$an a 4uestion, you are supposed to "e courteous and listen to the entire ans&er( - &ent &ith her to the +itchen of $y apart$ent( The telephone suddenly rang( - got scared that the telephone &as ringing in $y apart$ent and &ould &a+e $e up, &hich is &hy - i$$ediately started to loo+ at $y hand in order to $aintain( But the sensations &ere 4uite sta"le, and - stopped doing that( Then, $e and this lady &anted to coo+ so$ething in $y +itchen( She said that - could heat a frying pan &ithout gas( But - instead decided to try the techni4ue of putting the hands together and "lo&ing on the$, and returned "ac+ into $y "ody( <uestionsC .hich type of the entry into the phase did 1le#ander describe/ .as the cueing program of any help/ .hich type of anchor (as the leaping/ .hy (as the onset of consciousness immediately follo(ed by a transition into the stencil i.e. the real body though not completely/ .hich separation techni2ue helped him to get out of his

body again/ .hich techni2ue (as used for deepening/ .hich techni2ue for materiali=ing an ob%ect (as used correctly/ .hat should the procedure for obtaining information ha&e been started (ith/ .hat importance does a polite attitude to(ards elderly (omen in the phase ha&e/ .hy (as the return to body possible/ .hat did 1le#ander either forget to do or forget to record right after the foul/ 3ns6ers and Co''entsC 1le#ander described an entry into the phase through dream consciousness. 5y and large the onset of consciousness (as facilitated by prior (ork (ith the cueing program (hich though it failed to yield results strengthened the necessary intention to enter the phase. The leaping that accompanied the onset of consciousness may be compared (ith the sensations of le&itation that often lead to practitioners achie&ing dream consciousness. 4ince the techni2ues for deepening and maintaining (ere not used at the moment of dream consciousness a return to the body though partial naturally occurred. Furthermore 1le#ander managed to apply a separation techni2ue that most resembled climbing out. 6e then managed to deepen correctly by means of touching and immediately felt a result. 7espite the lack of a plan of action the practitioner competently decided to do something useful and employed the techni2ue of finding through a door in order to locate an animate source of information. 6e should ha&e first tried to test the sub%ect by asking special 2uestions to determine if the ob%ect (ould be able to pro&ide information Fsee ,hapter 1AG. 5eing polite to animate ob%ects in the phase is the prerogati&e of each person on an indi&idual basis but it hardly has any real basis. Most likely the return to the body (as triggered by a failure to maintain e#cessi&e thinking or temporary passi&ity. Upon e#iting the phase 1le#ander should ha&e tried to immediately return. 6o(e&er he failed to do so e&en though he had returned to the phase after e#iting dream consciousness. 4uch a step should ha&e been ob&ious due to an incomplete connection to the body.

NoD 1" Boris Bender Mo>ie #e hni ianJ E*perien ed Pra titioner of the PhaseD Mos o6J 9ussia - "eca$e conscious in $y drea$ al$ost i$$ediately after falling asleep( - &as in $y apart$ent standing in the corridor( Being surprised "y having so suddenly found $yself in the phase, - started to touch the &alls &ith $y hands to test their fir$ness or, Orealness,O as &ell as to intensify the phase "y touching( - entered the roo$( There &as a "ed standing ne#t to the &all, &ith $y $other sleeping on it( - could not see her face, only her "ody under the "lan+et( The roo$ and corridor &ere e#act replicas of their real-life counterparts( 5hile thin+ing a"out $y sleeping $other, - suddenly started to feel so$e&hat uneasy( 5hen - approached the &indo&, - sa& a grotes4ue landscape "ehind it that &as si$ilar to pictures fro$ $ovies a"out catastrophes' a &asteland, houses in ruins, odd pileups of "uilding $aterials, sla"s of concrete, gar"age, craters fro$ e#plosions here and there, and - noticed hu$an figures in so$e places( Fearing a foul caused "y the fact that - &as ta+ing in a panora$ic vie& Bthe vie& fro$ the &indo& spanned 1H degrees and cut off at the hori*on, &hich is in fact al$ost e#actly as the vie& fro$ $y apart$ent is in real life), - turned "ac+ into the roo$ and started to touch the &ardro"e, and then +nelt do&n to touch the floor( %ll the &hile, $y fear had "een gro&ing stronger and stronger' "oth out of thin+ing a"out $y sleeping $other and due to the vie& fro$ the &indo&( %n#iety turned into real fear &ithin a $atter of several seconds, and then graduated into terror and panic( - lost the a"ility to thin+ critically( - had only one thought' - had to go "ac+ to $y "ody( - darted "ac+ to $y "ed and suddenly found $yself lying on it( - closed $y eyes, "ut could not understand if - &ere in $y real "ody or still in the phase( My terror gre& even stronger &hen - halfopened $y eyes and sa& that $y $other &as getting up fro$ her "ed( She loo+ed li+e a character fro$ a horror $ovie and apparently &as hostile to $e(

- &anted to disappear, dissolve, and &a+e up, - hectically tried to recall the techni4ues for an e$ergency e#it fro$ the phase, "ut &ith poor results' - tried to free*e, rela# and touch $y fingers to $y toes in order to feel a connection &ith $y real "ody( %t so$e $o$ents felt li+e - had it, thin+ing, >The connection had "een restored,? opened $y eyes, "ut reali*ed that - &as still in the phase &hen - sa& that the roo$ had changed, and &as no& a&ash &ith gar"age( The fact that the atte$pts +ept ending &ith false a&a+enings &as driving $e cra*y( - &as especially shoc+ed &hen - got up after one of the false a&a+enings and sa& $y $other standing at $y "ed, still loo+ing threateningly at $e, li+e a va$pire or a *o$"ie fro$ a horror $ovie( Elus, she started to reach out to&ard $e &ith her hands, - nevertheless +ept on and tried to free*e and &iggle $y toes, this ti$e &ithout opening $y eyes, and not chec+ing &here - &as( started to cal$ do&n after so$e ti$e, "ut - &as una"le to feel $y real "ody, &hich &as confir$ed "y the fact that sounds &ere co$ing in fro$ the phase' - heard sparro&s chirping outside the &indo&, though it reality it &as too late for sparro&s to "e out( 0o&ever, the chirping and the associations that it "rought Bi(e( day, &ar$th, sparro&s, and sun), pro"a"ly helped $e a lot and cal$ed $e do&n, as - finally $anaged to sense $y real "ody and found $yself in reality( /evertheless, after - got up, - i$$ediately started to verify for a"out half a $inute that - &as no longer in the phase "y touching o"1ects, $a+ing sure that they &ere hard, and feeling all of $y "odily sensations( <uestionsC .hy (as there a risk that 5oris could return to his body (hen taking in the &ie( from the (indo(/ 6o( could 5oris ha&e e#amined the panoramic &ie( from the (indo( (ithout (orrying about a foul/ .hich techni2ue for deepening and !maintaining$ (as employed se&eral times/ .hat (ould ha&e happened if 5oris translocated from the source of the fear to another place/ 6o( could he ha&e o&ercome this problem/ .hy (as 5oris unable to easily e#it the phase and (hy (ere all of the techni2ues that he kne( of no practical use/

3ns6ers and Co''entsC .hen e#amining distant ob%ects in the phase there is al(ays a risk of returning to oneDs body because the acti&ity is rela#ing and rela#ation is detrimental to the length of a phase. 5oris could ha&e continued to take in the &ie( by simultaneously keeping up &ibrations periodically e#amining his hands or rubbing them together. 7uring the entire length of 5orisDs phase he performed sensory amplification by touching to deepen and maintain the phase. )f he tried to run a(ay from his mother to another place in the phase she probably (ould ha&e caught up (ith him there any(ay. 6e should ha&e tried to yell at her in an aggressi&e tone. This (ould ha&e helped him to o&ercome his fear and either scare the ob%ect a(ay or make it more agreeable. Problems (ith an emergency e#it from the phase arose because it (as the beginning of the night and the mind still needed to dream and thus kept pulling him into that process. NoD 1% 3le*ei #eslen!o I# EngineerJ E*perien ed Pra titioner of the PhaseD Mos o6J 9ussia %ctually, - &as not planning to travel that night, "ut &hen - &o+e up around $idnight - decided to try to enter the phase nevertheless( started to perfor$ phanto$ $ove$ents &ith $y ar$s, "ut then a strong sleepy lethargy overca$e $e and - suddenly &anted to give up $y atte$pts to enter the phase and si$ply fall asleep( 0o&ever, &as persistent and continued to perfor$ phanto$ $ove$ents &ith $y ar$s( -nstead of feeling the usual vi"rations that occur &hen this techni4ue is perfor$ed, - si$ply fell asleep and continued the phanto$ $ove$ents &hile drea$ing( Because of that, $y consciousness apparently did not fall asleep co$pletely, and "eca$e a&are that - &as drea$ing( - i$$ediately cli$"ed out of $y "ody( There &as no vision, conscious a&areness &as no $ore than 6 7, so the phase &as not that deep( -n order to $aintain the phase, - i$$ediately started chaotically touching everything around $e( -t helped( Fision ca$e,

though it &as $ur+y( - then found $yself in $y apart$ent( - decided to strive to deepen( 2ach ti$e that - e#ercised that techni4ue, the phase "eca$e deeper and deeper( %fter - had achieved a sta"le phase, - decided that it &ould "e good to gra" a snac+ and headed for the fridge( - should add that - &as on a strict diet at the ti$e and &as craving so$ething s&eet or fried( 0o&ever, &hen - opened the fridge, - &as 4uite disappointed( There &as a lot of food in the fridge, "ut all of it re4uired preparation Bra& $eat, fish, dill, etc()( 0o&ever, there &as a "ottle of spar+ling $ineral &ater on a special lo&er shelf in the fridge( 5ithout giving it any thought, - too+ the "ottle and started to chug it( %ll of the sensations &ere 1ust as in real life' - felt the "u""les fro$ the car"onation, that peculiar taste that $ineral &ater has, and also ho& the &ater &ent do&n $y throat( -n general, everything &as 4uite realistic, though there &as no sensation of $y sto$ach filling up &ith &ater and, $oreover, the &ater felt so$e&hat dry( -t sounds funny, "ut that very feeling of &ater.s dryness spoiled $y overall i$pression so$e&hat( %fter a foul, - reali*ed that a possi"le reason for this $ight have "een dryness in the $outh of $y real "ody( <sually, if there are, for e#a$ple, candies in the +itchen or in the fridge, - actually ta+e a handful of the$ and consu$e the$ &hile traveling through the phase( %fter going to the fridge, - &anted to see so$ething interesting( decided to e$ploy the techni4ue for creating o"1ects and people, and so - closed $y eyes and focused on the i$age of a girl &ho$ &anted to see at that very $o$ent( - affir$ed $y desire, and - then opened $y eyes, concentrating on the area to $y side( The air gre& $isty at first, and then the person - &as e#pecting $ateriali*ed out of the air, and ca$e to life, see$ingly fully autono$ous and &ith free &ill - she had the sa$e $anner of spea+ing as in real life, and acted in the sa$e &ay( The foul happened &hile $y conversation &ith the girl &as in full s&ingP <uestionsC .hich type of the techni2ue did 1le#ei ultimately use/ .hy did lethargy and dro(siness arise during phantom (iggling/ .hat should be done in this type of situation/ .hat (as most likely lacking (hen the indirect techni2ue (as performed and

(hy did the e#perience end (ith 1le#ei falling asleep/ .hat techni2ues for deepening (ere used/ .hat could ha&e been done to 2uickly fill the fridge (ith ready"to"eat food/ .hich techni2ue for finding an ob%ect (as used (ith regard to the girl/ .hat else could ha&e been used for the same purpose considering 1le#eiEs actions/ .hat should ha&e been done immediately after the foul/ 6o( many practical applications of the phase did 1le#ei manage to try/ 3ns6ers and Co''entsC The entry to the phase happened because 1le#ei had become a(are that he (as dreaming (hile he rightly tried to resist the sudden tiredness and dro(siness o&er the course of the unsuccessful attempt (ith the indirect techni2ue of phantom (iggling. Usually such dro(siness signifies that a phase is approaching signaling a need for aggression acti&eness and attention in order to o&ercome inertia and enter the phase. 6o(e&er attenti&eness (as lacking so 1le#ei fell asleep. 6o(e&er his desire to enter the phase (as so strong that the phantom (iggling continued e&en (hile he (as dreaming causing him to e#perience dream consciousness. 1mong techni2ues employed for deepening (ere sensory amplification through touching and %ogging. )t (ould ha&e been sufficient to employ the techni2ue of finding through a door to ensure that the fridge (as properly stocked. For e#ample 1le#ei should ha&e closed the door on the refrigerator focused his attention on a full stock of snacks and food and then opened the door to disco&er that e&erything heDd en&isioned (as there. The techni2ue for finding an ob%ect through transformation (as used to make the girl appear but this techni2ue should be considered only by e#perienced practitioners because it can lead to a foul in case of insufficient concentration. 5efore employing the techni2ue 1le#ei shut his eyes and only then imagined the girl right in front of him. 6e could ha&e immediately created her using the techni2ue of closed eyes (hich usually is easier to do since there is no direct &isual contact (ith surroundings. Upon returning to his body he should ha&e tried to separate again. 1ltogether 1le#ei managed to and make progress in t(o specific applied tasks though did not complete them satisfactorily.

E*er ises for Chapter 1"

#as!s Try to assess the e#periences described abo&e using the rubric belo(. The ans(ers are located in the appendi#. )-Point Syste' for 3ssessing the <uality of Out-of-Body E*perien es @PhasesA 7eliberate entry into the phase using any techni2ue The phase (orld (as realistic or (as made realistic Phase (as of a&erage or abo&e"a&erage duration F+ minutes or moreG 7eliberate use of the phase to (ork to(ards a specific goal 7eliberately studying the phase or e#perimenting (ith it (hile in it. )f there is some doubt any regarding any item only half a point should be a(arded.

Q1 Q1 Q1 Q1 Q1

Chapter 1% - Putting a /a e on the Pheno'enon

Stephen ;aBerge 4tephen 0a5erge (as born in 1@:> in the United 4tates. 1t the age of 1@ he recei&ed a 5achelorDs 7egree in mathematics from 1ri=ona 4tate Uni&ersity after (hich he enrolled as a graduate student in the ,hemistry program at 4tanford Uni&ersity. )n 1@<@ he took an academic lea&e of absence. 6e returned to 4tanford in 1@>> and began studying the human mind including sub%ects related to dreaming. 0a5erge recei&ed his Ph.7. in psychophysiology in 1@?A. 6e founded the 0ucidity )nstitute in 1@?>. 4tephen 0a5erge has made the largest scientific contribution to the study of phase states. )t suffices to say that 0a5erge (as the first in the (orld to pro&e during a full"fledged scientific e#periment that it is possible to become conscious (hile dreaming This (as done through logging specific signals made (ith the eyes by a person dreaming (hile sleeping under measurement instruments. These e#periments also pro&ed that eye mo&ement in the physical body and percei&ed body are synchronous. Mucid 3rea$ing first published in 1@?; is 0a5ergeEs most (ell" kno(n book. 2#ploring the 5orld of Mucid 3rea$ing, a book that 0a5erge (rote (ith 6o(ard Rheingold (as published in 1@@A. )t (as mainly thanks to the efforts of 0a5erge that mind"machines for achie&ing dream consciousness (ere created such as 7ream0ight 'o&a7reamer and 7reamMaker.

The key feature of 0a5ergeDs (ork and achie&ements is an absolutely pragmatic approach to the nature of the phenomenon. 1rguably he is one of the fe( authors and researchers totally lacking in irrationality. E&erything that can be read and learned from his books is &erifiable and accessible for e&eryone (ith no peddling of out"of"this"(orld superpo(ers. Carlos Castaneda 7ue to ,arlos ,astanedaDs desire to follo( the spiritual practice of the .arriorDs Path (hich entails erasing oneDs personal history the details of his biography are unclear. 1s far as ,astanedaDs early years are concerned it can only be stated that he (as born outside of the United 4tates sometime bet(een 1@+; and 1@8;. 6e enrolled at the Uni&ersity of ,alifornia 0os 1ngeles FU,01G in the 1@<As (here he recei&ed a Ph.7. in anthropology on the basis of his books. ,astanedaDs entire life path (as de&oted to studying the teachings of a certain Cuan Matus or don Cuan ,achora. )t is more than likely that his persona is a composite"image of an )ndian 4haman a sorcerer and an heir of the culture of the ancient !Toltecs$. ,astaneda (rote a do=en booksJ ho(e&er the book The %rt of 3rea$ing F1@@8G has the most to do (ith the phase state. )t contains se&eral effecti&e techni2ues for entering the phase through dream consciousness. 6is sub%ect matter is soaked in a large amount of mysticism and &irtually de&oid of any pragmatism. 7espite the fact that the main orientation of ,astanedaDs (ork did not touch upon the phase state he ne&ertheless became one of the founding fathers of this field as his general popularity reached massi&e proportions (orld(ide. ,arlos ,astaneda passed a(ay in 1@@?.

9o0ert 3D Monroe Robert Monroe (as born in the United 4tates in 1@1;. )n 1@8> he graduated from Ohio 4tate Uni&ersity (ith a degree in Engineering. 6e (orked for some time as a radio program producer and director until he established his o(n radio company in 'e( Pork (hich rapidly e#panded. )n 1@;< his company also conducted a study about the effect of sound (a&es on the abilities of the mind. )n 1@;? Monroe had an accidental personal e#perience (ith the phase phenomenon (hich strongly stoked his interest in the sub%ect to (hich he (ould de&ote his entire career. )n 1@>: he founded the Monroe )nstitute (hich (as entirely de&oted to studying unusual states of consciousness and the ability to influence them through audio stimulation and other technologies. One of its main achie&ements (as the creation of the 6emi"4ync system (hich (as designed to help a person reach altered states of consciousness including out"of"body states by synchroni=ing the t(o hemispheres of the brain. 6is first book Journeys Out of the Body (as published in 1@>1. T(o books then follo(ed- Far Journeys F1@?;G and <lti$ate Journey F1@@:G. Robert Monroe has so far made the largest contribution to(ard populari=ing the phase state. 6o(e&er he understood the phase more as an actual e#it of the mind from the body (hich is (hy the term !out"of"body e#perience$ FO5EG (as introduced. The book Journeys Out of the Body (as such a massi&e success that Monroe 2uickly became an undisputed authority in the field. 6o(e&er the large influence of mysticism on MonroeDs (ork and &ie(s cannot be ignored. This is especially apparent after his second book. The ma%ority of phenomena described in the book ha&e not been &erified in practice. The only attempt at conducting a full" fledged scientific e#periment pro&ing that the mind left the body (as

unsuccessful. )n the end typical misconceptions about the phase became (idespread as did a(areness of the e#istence of out"of"body e#periences. Robert Monroe passed a(ay in 1@@;. Patri ia Garfield Patricia 3arfield (as born in 1@8: in the United 4tates. From the age of 1: she kept an uninterrupted daily dream %ournal that (ould allo( her and all of humanity great insight into dreams phenomena associated (ith the phase. 4he (as one of the founders of The 1ssociation for the 4tudy of 7reams. 7r. 3arfield holds a Ph.7. in clinical psychology. 4he is the author of a great number of books (ith the 1@>: best" seller :reative 3rea$ing being the most (idely lauded. )t (as one of the first pieces of literature to approach the phase state in a practical and non"specialist (ay and recei&ed (orld(ide interest and appreciation. The book contains good practical guidelines and also describes the dreaming practices of &arious cultures. Syl>an Muldoon 4yl&an Muldoon (as born in the United 4tates in 1@A8. 6e is considered to be the 1merican pioneer in the study of the phase although he used the esoteric term astral. 6e inad&ertently (oke up in the phase at the age of 1+ (here he sa( a cord connecting his percei&ed body to his real body. Muldoon first thought that he (as dying during the e#perience although he e&entually concluded that this (as an instance of !astral pro%ection$. 6e had repeated e#perience (ith the phenomenon but Muldoon (as still unable to become an ad&anced practitioner due to a lack of full control o&er the practice.

1fter coordinating efforts (ith 6ere(ard ,arrington the famous 1merican in&estigator of the unkno(n the t(o published the sensational %ointly authored book The Ero1ection of the %stral Body in 1@+@. The authors published t(o other books- The :ase for %stral Ero1ection F1@8<G and The Eheno$ena of %stral Ero1ection F1@;1G. 7espite a large ser&ing of esotericism MuldoonDs books Fespecially the first oneG contain a lot of helpful practical information and e#planation of the most di&erse phenomena that can occur during the phase. 6o(e&er Muldoon is considered to be the greatest populari=er of irrational esoteric terms and theories (hich subse2uently became 2uite (idespread. 4yl&an Muldoon passed a(ay in 1@>1. Charles ;ead0eater ,harles 0eadbeater (as born in England in 1?:> F1?;: according to some sourcesG. 1fter dropping out of O#ford due to hard times 0eadbeater became an ordained priest but then became 2uite acti&e in the occult. This led to his becoming a member of the Theosophical 4ociety in 1??8. 0eadbeater became one of its most famous participants. The combination of a bright mind scientific kno(ledge and interest in the paranormal led him to publish many books on many di&erse topics. One of them 3rea$s' 5hat They %re and 0o& They %re :aused F1?@?G (as one of the first (orks to touch upon the phenomenon of the phase. 0eadbeaterDs (riting is saddled (ith a ton of esoteric terms and theories. )n it the term astral plane is predominantly used for the phase. 'e&ertheless the book is not (ithout some helpful guidelines concerning techni2ues. ,harles 0eadbeater passed a(ay in 1@8:.

9o0ert Bru e Robert 5ruce (as born in England in 1@;;. 6e has performed his lifeEs (ork (hile li&ing in 1ustralia. 1fter studying and promoting dissociati&e phenomena for many years by the beginning of the +1st century he had become one of the leading authorities in the field. 6e is also a specialist in many other paranormal fields of study. Robert 5ruce (rote se&eral books the most important and (ell kno(n of (hich is %stral 3yna$ics F1@@@G. The author holds 2uite open esoteric &ie(s (hich are &ery strongly reflected in his theories and terminology. The helpful practical guidelines in his books are 2uite often loaded (ith a large amount of information that has not been &erified or pro&en by anyone. Robert 5ruce is also a propagator of typical superstitions and stereotypes concerning the phase phenomenon. 9i hard (e0ster Richard .ebster (as born in 'e( Realand (here he still resides. 6e is the author of about ;A publications that ha&e sold many millions of copies around the (orld. 6o(e&er only one of them %stral Travel for Beginners is completely de&oted to the phase state. The book is saturated (ith (idespread misconceptions about the phase phenomenon and misguided theories trying to e#plain it. The techni2ue"related aspect of the book is also presented ineffecti&ely. )t is 2uite likely that the author himself has no practical e#perience (hich can also be said for the contents of his other do=ens of books de&oted to &arious topics.

Charles #art ,harles Tart (as born in the United 4tates in 1@8>. 6e recei&ed his Ph. 7. in psychology in 1@<8 at the Uni&ersity of 'orth ,arolina. Tart also recei&ed training at 4tanford Uni&ersity. 6e (as one of the founders of transpersonal psychology. 6e became one of the most preeminent researchers of unusual states of a(areness after the publication of %ltered States of :onsciousness F1@<@G the first book that he (orked on. )t (as one of the first books to e#amine entering the phase through dream consciousness. The book recei&ed popularity (hen the use 047 and Mari%uana (ere often &ie(ed as &ehicles to ele&ated consciousness and the book e&en describes the use of chemical substances in the conte#t of phase states.

Chapter 1& /inal #est

The 2uestions on the test may ha&e one or more correct ans(ers or none of the ans(ers may be correct. Thus the 2uestions must be read completely through and attention must be paid to their implications and finer points. 1 studentDs theoretical kno(ledge is considered to be satisfactory if the correct ans(ers to at least one"half of the 2uestions are gi&en. )f a score of less than ;AK is recei&ed a student should study the (eak points again or re"read the entire guidebook. Other(ise it is 2uite probable that fundamental mistakes (ill be made (hich (ill in turn interfere (ith indi&idual practice. )f a score of at least ?AK is achie&ed then a theoretical kno(ledge of the practice is at an ad&anced le&el (hich (ill surely ha&e a positi&e effect on the practitionerDs direct e#periences in the phase. 1ns(ers are in the appendi# at the end of the guidebook. 1D Noise and realisti i'ages une*pe tedly arise 6hen perfor'ing the indire t te hni$ue of phanto' 6igglingD (hat an 0e done: 1G ,ontinue (ith phantom (iggling. 5G 4(itch to obser&ing images or listening in. ,G Try to do all or some of the techni2ues simultaneously. 7G ,hoose the techni2ue (ith the strongest precursors and continue (ith that one.

"D 3 pra titioner unintentionally opens the eyes for se>eral se onds upon a6a!eningD (hat is the 0est 6ay to start indire t te hni$ues fro' in this ase: 1G 1ttempting to separate. 5G The obser&ing images techni2ue. ,G The rapid eye mo&ement techni2ue. 7G The forced falling asleep techni2ue. EG )tDs best to not start any techni2ue and fall back to sleep (ith the intention of rea(akening and trying to do e&erything again (ithout first mo&ing. %D (hi h a tions are prefera0le for perfor'ing a dire t te hni$ue 0efore falling asleep for the night after a long period of sleep depri>ation or e*haustion: 1G Monotonously performing the obser&ing images techni2ue. 5G 5eing attenti&e and concentrating on actions. ,G The absence of a free"floating state of consciousness. 7G Ouickly alternating techni2ues. EG 6igh"2uality rela#ation. &D Mild >i0rations o ur 6hen perfor'ing a dire t te hni$ueD Can the straining the 0rain te hni$ue 0e used to a'plify the >i0rations: 1G Pes. 5G 'o. ,G )t may be used but for practical purposes " only (hen a practitioner is e#hausted or sleep"depri&ed. 7G)t may be used as long as the attempt to enter the phase is not being made during the day )D (hi h of the a tions gi>en 0elo6 in rease the li!elihood of entering the phase through drea' ons iousness 6hen used right 0efore falling asleep: 1G Performing direct techni2ues.

5G )ntending to perform indirect techni2ues upon a(akening. ,G Recalling dreams from the night before. 7G ,reating a plan of action for use in case of entrance to the phase in such a (ay. +D If a6areness o urs at the >ery last 'o'ent of a drea' that fades a6ayJ 6hi h of the a tions gi>en 0elo6 should 0e underta!en in order to enter the phase as soon as possi0le: 1G Try to fall asleep again in order to once again become self"a(are (hile dreaming. 5G )mmediately perform indirect techni2ues. ,G Take a break and perform direct techni2ues later. 7G 4tart to recall that nightDs dreams. ,D (hi h of these are 'ost li!ely to produ e a $ui ! phase entry 6hen a6a!ening in a state of sleep paralysis: 1G Rela#ation. 5G Falling asleep (ith the intention of becoming self"a(are (hile in a dream. ,G Mo&ing the physical eyes and tongue. 7G 7irect techni2ues. -D (hat should 0e done 6hen spontaneously thro6n fro' the 0ody 6hile lying do6n or 6a!ing up in the 'iddle of the night: 1G Return to the body and perform appropriate separation techni2ues. 5G )mplement a predetermined plan of action for the phase. ,G 7eepen immediately. 7G Try to 2uickly establish &ision if it is not already present. 7G Employ the forced falling asleep techni2ue. .D (hile trying to enter the phaseJ rolling out 6or!s at firstJ 0ut only partiallyJ and the 'o>e'ent annot 0e e*tended any

further no 'atter 6hat effort is 'adeD (hat is it 0est to do in this situation: 1G Try to turn back and roll out further once again and repeat se&eral times. 5G 4tart doing cycles of indirect techni2ues. ,G Take a break and try to separate after se&eral minutes. 7G Try to separate by le&itating getting up or climbing out. EG Use any indirect techni2ue for phase entry and attempt rolling out again. 12D 3 pra titioner une*pe tedly gets stu ! in the floor or 6all 6hile rolling outD (hat should 0e done to resu'e the phase: 1G Force through the obstacle. 5G Employ translocation techni2ues. ,G 1ttempt to return to the body and roll out again. 7G 5ecome able to locate an e#it from the problem. EG Perform sensory amplification. 11D 7o6 'ay a pra titioner deepen the phase 6hile flying through a dar! for'less spa e 6hile separating: 1G Employ the techni2ue of falling headfirst. 5G There is no (ay to do this. ,G ,reate and amplify &ibrations. 7G 5egin self"palpation. EG Translocate to another area in the phase and deepen it through sensory amplification. 1"D If deepening te hni$ues do not o'pletely 6or! 6ithin 1) to %2 se ondsJ 6hat an 0e done: 1G ,ontinue trying to go deeper. 5G E#it from the phase. ,G 1ttempt to return to the body and once use phase entrance techni2ues. 7G Proceed to performing predetermined actions.

1%D (hi h te hni$ue or 6ay of 'aintaining the phase should 0e used 6hen teleporting so'e6here 6ith losed eyes: 1G The techni2ue of amplifying and maintaining &ibrations. 5G Tactile sensory amplification feeling the sensation of rubbing the hands together. ,G 'o techni2ue. 7G The techni2ue of rotation. EG Repeating aloud the desire to remain in the phase. 1&D In 6hi h situations is falling asleep in the phase 'ost li!ely: 1G .hen looking for a desired person. 5G .hen communicating (ith animate ob%ects. ,G .hen completely calm ha&ing completely halted all acti&ity. 7G .hen tra&elling aimlessly. EG .hen taking part in side e&ents. 1)D (hi h of the follo6ing indi ators guarantees that the phase has 0een e*ited for reality: 1G 1 clock sho(s the right time and the same time e&en if a practitioner turns a(ay from it and then looks at it again. 5G 4ensations are completely realistic. ,G The presence of friends or family in the room (ho communicate (ith the practitioner. 7G 1n inner feeling that the phase has ended. EG 'othing happens after staring at the end of a finger from close distance for fi&e to 1A seconds. 1+D In 6hi h situations should tra>elling in the phase 0e deli0erately dis ontinued: 1G .hen a fear that a return (ill be impossible or a direct fear of death arises. 5G .hen there is a real possibility that the practitioner (ill be late for something in the physical (orld. ,G .hen frightened by some strange e&ents or ob%ects.

7G .hen there is an ine#plicable mortal fear of something unkno(n or incomprehensible. EG )f someone in the phase strongly insists that the practitioner should return to reality. FG )f sharp pain occurs in the body that is not caused by interaction (ith ob%ects in the phase (orld. 1,D (hat 6ill 'ost li!ely o ur 6hen trying to e>ade so'e a6ful 0eing or dangerous person: 1G The ob%ect (ill get bored and stop. 5G Fear of the ob%ect (ill go a(ay. ,G The phase (ill occur more fre2uently as (ell as be longer and deeper than usual. 7G The practitioner (ill become calmer and unner&ed less fre2uently. EG The more fear there is the more often the ob%ect (ill chase the practitioner. 1-D (hen should esta0lishing >ision in the phase 0e onsideredJ if it has not o urred on its o6n: 1G )mmediately upon separation (ithout deepening. 5G )mmediately after deepening. ,G .hile flying through dark space during translocation. 7G 1fter fi&e to 1A seconds of being sure that a phase entry has occurred. EG .hen there is a desire to immediately e#plore the surroundings after separation has occurred. 1.D 7o6 is it possi0le to pass through a 6all 6hile standing lose to itJ 6ithout stopping to loo! at it fro' lose range: 1G 5y gradually pushing the hands and arms through it and then the entire body and head. 5G 5y gradually pushing the head through it at first and then the entire body. ,G 5y trying to put a hole in it and then e#panding the hole and climbing through it.

7G 5y ramming it (ith a shoulder trying to bring it do(n. "2D (hile in the phaseJ a pra titioner is in a situation 6here the ar's are totally paralyHed and i''o0iliHedD #his happens in a roo' 6ith a single e*itC a door that has started to loseD (hat are the t6o easiest 6ays to !eep the door open: 1G Order the door to stay open in a loud imperious and asserti&e manner. 5G Free the arms and hold back the door. ,G 4top the door (ith telekinesis. 7G ,reate a person through the method of finding. EG There is no (ay to do this. "1D (hat diffi ulties 'ay arise for a pra titioner in the phase 6hile using the door te hni$ue of translo ation: 1G The door (ill not open. 5G The (rong place is behind the door. ,G )t is not possible to use the hand to pull the door handle because the hand goes through the handle. 7G 7ifficulties (ith internal concentration occur at the critical moment. EG 1 black &oid often appears on the other side of the door. ""D (hat are ne essary onditions for getting results 6hen translo ating in the phase after rolling out during initial separation fro' the 0ody: 1G 1bsence of &ision. 5G Practicing after sunset. ,G 1 firm intention to end up some(here. 7G ,ertainty of the final result. EG The presence of &ibrations. "%D 3 pra titioner is in a dar! roo' in the phase 6here e>erything is poorly >isi0leD #here is a handelierJ 0ut no light s6it hD 7o6 an the s6it h 0e a ti>ated to light the roo':

1G Translocate through teleportation to the place (here the toggle or s(itch for the light in 2uestion is located. 5G Find a flashlight through the method of finding and illuminate the room (ith it. ,G Rub the light bulbs in the chandelier (ith the hands. 7G ,reate a light s(itch in the room using the method of finding an ob%ect. EG ,lose the eyes and imagine that the room is already lit and then open the eyes. "&D (hen o''uni ating 6ith an ani'ate o01e t in the phaseJ a desire to add a spe ifi person to the s enery arisesD (hi h of the follo6ing a tions are ad>isa0le only for 0eginners in this ase: 1G Propose going to a neighboring room (here the needed sub%ect (ill be presented through the use of the door or corner techni2ue. 5G 4ummon the needed person by calling their name loudly. ,G Translocate back to the same place and ha&e both animate ob%ects present there upon your return. 7G 1dd the needed person through the closed eyes techni2ue. EG 1sk the animate ob%ect that you are talking to if it does not mind adding someone to the scenery. ")D (here is one not allo6ed to go using translo ation te hni$ues: 1G )nside a mammoth. 5G To the past or the future. ,G To hea&en. 7G To an episode of the mo&ie Star 5ars. "+D 7o6 6ill a de eased person differ fro' a prototype in the phase 6hen orre tly perfor'ing the te hni$ue for finding the person:

1G Only the practitioner himself can con%ure up differences or not see or percei&e them. 5G The deceased (ill ha&e a different timbre of &oice. ,G There (ill be a radiant halo around the deceasedDs head. 7G Physical perception of the deceased (ill be less realistic than in real life. EG The deceased (ill not remember anything. ",D (hat diffi ulties an arise in the phase 6hile o0taining infor'ation fro' ani'ate sour es of infor'ation: 1G )nability to remember information obtained. 5G 4ources of information are silent. ,G )nade2uateness of the sources of information. 7G 4e#ual attraction if the source of information is of the opposite or desired se#. EG 5eing gi&en false information. "-D 7o6 'ight a pra titioner a elerate the healing pro ess of a old that is hara teriHed 0y a stuffy nose and a sore throat: 1G Maintaining and amplifying &ibrations for the entire length of the phase and entering it o&er se&eral days in a ro(. 5G Taking aspirin and entering the phase o&er se&eral days in a ro(. ,G Tra&elling to hot places in the phase and entering it o&er se&eral days in a ro(. 7G E#periencing stressful situations o&er se&eral phases. EG Finding a doctor in the phase and asking him (hat it is best to do in real"life or e&en in the phase itself. ".D (hi h of the follo6ing a hie>e'ents 0elong to Stephen ;aBerge: 1G Founding the 0ucidity )nstitute. 5G 1 Ph.7. in anthropology. ,G 4cientifically pro&ing that lucid dreaming is possible. 7G 1 Ph.7. in psychophysiology.

EG Pro&ing that eye mo&ements in the phase and in reality are synchroni=ed. %2D (ho of approa hed the study of the phase state fro' a prag'ati point-of->ie6 that 6as totally de>oid of o ultis': 1G 4tephen 0a5erge 5G Robert Monroe ,G 4yl&an Muldoon 7G ,harles 0eadbeater EG Patricia 3arfield FG ,arlos ,astaneda

3ppendi*

3SSESSMEN# O/ P93C#I#IONE9S5 EEPE9IENCES @C73P#E9 1"A These assessments of the practitionersD e#periences refer only to the specific descriptions that they submitted and are not meant as an assessment of their practice as a (hole. 4ome of practitioners (ould easily be able to e#perience successful phases earning four to fi&e points at other times. This especially concerns 5oris Pronyakin 1le#ander 7yrenko& 5oris 5ender and 1le#ei Teslenko. This is also possibly true of the other practitioners (ith (hom the author is not closely ac2uainted. 'o. 1 5oris Pronyakin I A.; points 'o. + 1le#ei 5akhare& I A.; points 'o. 8 7mitry Marko& I A points 'o. : )&an Pako&le& I 1.; points 'o. ; 'atalya Bo=heno&a I 1 point 'o. < 1le#ander Furmenko& I 1 point 'o.> Roman Reuto& I 8 points 'o. ? 1le#ander 7yrenko& I 1.; points 'o. @ 4&yatosla& 5arano& I + points 'o. 1A Oleg 4ushchenko I +.; points 'o. 11 1le#ander 0eleko& I 1.; points 'o. 1+ 5oris 5ender I + points 'o. 18 1le#ei Teslenko I 8 points

3NS(E9S #O #7E /IN3; #ES# @C73P#E9 1&A 1. 1 5 , 7J +. 7J 8. 5 , 7J :. ,J ;. 1 5 , 7J <. 5J >. I ?. ,J @. 1 7 EJ 1A. 5 ,J 11. 1 , 7 EJ 1+. 1 7 1Q7J 18. ,J 1:. 7 EJ 1;. EJ 1<. 5 FJ 1>. , EJ 1?. 5 7J 1@. I +A. 1 ,J +1. 1 5 7J ++. 1 , 7J +8. EJ +:. 5J +;. IJ +<. 1J +>. 5 , 7 EJ +?. 5 , EJ +@. 1 , 7 EJ 8A. 1 EJ

3 SIMP;I/IED DESC9IP#ION O/ #7E E3SIES# ME#7OD /O9 EN#E9ING #7E P73SE 4SING INDI9EC# #EC7NI<4ES Upon a(akening (ithout mo&ing or opening the eyes immediately try to separate from oneEs body. The separation attempt should be carried out (ithout any imagining but rather (ith the desire to make a real mo&ement (ithout straining the muscles Frolling out le&itation standing up etc.G. )f separation does not occur (ithin three to fi&e seconds immediately try alternating se&eral of the most effecti&e techni2ues for three to fi&e seconds each. .hen one of the techni2ues (orks continue it for a longer period of time" Obser&ing images- Try to e#amine and discern the pictures arising before closed eyes. " 0istening in- 1ttempt to hear sounds in the head and make these louder by listening in or strengthening the (illJ " Rotating- )magine rotating around the head"to"foot a#isJ " Phantom (iggling- Try to mo&e a part of the body (ithout straining the muscles and try to increase the range of mo&ementJ " 4training the brain- Try straining the brain (hich (ill lead to &ibrations that may also be intensified by straining the brain.

1s soon as one techni2ue clearly starts to (ork continue (ith it as long as progress is apparent and then try to separate. )f separation fails return to the techni2ue that (as (orking. 7o not gi&e up alternating through techni2ues until one minute has elapsed but do not continue for more than t(o minutes. 4eparation from the body may be attempted periodically especially if interesting sensations occur. #3=E P39# IN 9ESE39C7 Take part in the research of a techni2ue. The techni2ue of imagined sensations is described in ,hapter + in the section on 4econdary Techni2ues. This techni2ue is also commonly kno(n as the !cell phone techni2ue$. .hile this guidebook (as being (ritten e#periments (ith this techni2ue (ere conducted at the 4chool of Out" of"5ody Tra&elDs seminars. Results (ere astounding. 7ue to the fact that this techni2ue is easy to understand and apply in practice it could be the most straightfor(ard and effecti&e one for achie&ing the phase state. 1lmost e&ery second attempt made (ith this techni2ue has yielded results pro&ided it is employed as an indirect techni2ue. 7ue to this techni2ueDs huge potential for populari=ing and spreading kno(ledge of the phenomenon anyone (ho is interested is in&ited to take part in a global e#periment of the techni2ueDs effecti&eness. )n addition to testing it a researcher may propose the techni2ue to interested persons or post it on the )nternet to increase the number of practitioners. Please submit the results of your e#periments (ith the techni2ue to the e"mail address- aing*aing.ru 6ere it is#7E CE;; P7ONE #EC7NI<4E The practice of this phase entry techni2ue is to imagine the sensation that something is resting in the hand desirably upon a(akening (ithout any physical mo&ement. )t is best to imagine a cell phone is in the hand because the modern person is 2uite

accustomed to this sensation although any other ob%ect (ill do. )t is necessary to acti&ely and attenti&ely focus on the sensations in the palm of the hand. Most likely the physical sensation of a phone lying in the hand (ill 2uickly arise. The sensation (ill become increasingly palpable. )f a sensation does not arise (ithin 1A seconds the techni2ue not going to (ork and it is time to s(itch to another one. .hen the sensation of a phone in the hand occurs focus e&ery bit of attention on it. )t should be noted that this (ill not be an imagined sensation but a real one. This should be understood from the &ery beginning and results should be e#pected. Once the sensation is stable start feeling the mobile phone (ith the fingers. Physical sensations should be e#perienced. The physical body of course must not mo&e or strain. )f this does not (ork only focus attention on the sensation of the phone lying in the hand and try to feel the phone (ith the fingers later. )f feeling the phone (ith the fingers is successful acti&ely roll the phone around the hand feeling all of its details. 1s soon as it is possible to roll the cell phone around in the hand separation from the body may be attempted. )n this case it is usually easiest to separate by rolling out or standing up. ,ontinue to hold the phone and roll it around (hich (ill maintain the emerging phase state. 4eparation in this case should be more like actually getting up physically or rolling out of bed rather than actually separating one thing from something else. That is do this in the same (ay as physically getting out of bed starting from the sensation of the phone in the hand. )f separation is unsuccessful continue to attenti&ely feel the phone in the hand for a little (hile longer and try to separate again. )f separation happens the ne#t step is to take actions that are typical for a phase e#perience- deepening and then accomplishing predetermined tasks (hile performing !maintaining$ techni2ues. )f only a partial separation occurs then separation by force should be attempted. 3enerally the real sensation of a phone in the hand arises (ith e&ery second attempt. Furthermore achie&ing success only re2uires e#perience and some de#terity since feeling the sensation of a phone

in the hand signifies that the re2uired state has been reached and subse2uent actions may be attempted. 3##EN#IONF .hen making attempts to enter the phase the practitioner should ha&e complete confidence that he (ill be immediately successful in e&erything. E&en a shroud of doubt (ill keep the practitioner in his body this is especially true (hen it comes to indirect techni2ues. Four typical barriers to mastering the phase encountered by @AK of practicioners1 " Forgetting to deepen the phase + " Forgetting to maintain the phase 8 " 1bsence of a plan of action (hen in the phase : " Forgetting to try to re"enter the phase after a foul #7E SC7OO; O/ O4#-O/-BOD8 #93?E; Michael RadugaDs 4chool of Out"of"5ody Tra&el conducts training seminars in many countries around the (orld. The course(ork allo(s students to master the phase phenomenon and hone their skills at tra&eling in the phase. )nformation on e#isting branches and seminar schedules are a&ailable on the (ebsite www.obe4u.com. .e also (elcome potential partners interested in organi=ing 4chool of Out"of"5ody Tra&el branches and seminars. 1ll correspondence regarding seminars partnerships and proposals related to the translation of this book may be handled by e"mail at aing*aing.ru. B9IE/ G;OSS398 O/ #E9MS 3ND DE/INI#IONS Out-of-Body e*perien e @OBEAJ lu id drea'ing @;DAJ astral a number of terms united by the phase that refer to the state in (hich a

person (hile being fully conscious reali=es consciousness outside the normal range of physical perception. Indire t te hni$ues I entry into the phase (ithin fi&e minutes of a(akening from sleep of any duration " pro&ided there has been minimal physical mo&ement. Dire t te hni$ues I entry into the phase (ithout any prior sleep after e#cessi&e physical mo&ement upon a(akening or ha&ing been a(ake for at least fi&e minutes. Drea' Cons iousness I entry into the phase through becoming consciously a(are (hile a dream episode is happening. Disso iation I separationJ in this case a scientific term describing e#periences in the phase. Sleep paralysis I a stuporJ the complete immobili=ation that often occurs (hen falling asleep a(akening and entering or e#iting the phase. Sten il I the real physical body that is no longer percei&ed (hile in the phase. Deepening the phase I methods for making the phase as realistic as possible by stabili=ing the surrounding space. Maintaining the phase I methods for maintaining the phase state by pre&enting a lapse into sleep a return to reality or an imagined return to reality. 9EM I rapid eye mo&ement sleep FREM phaseGJ a sleep phase that is characteri=ed by increased brain acti&ity that is accompanied by rapid eye mo&ement and dreaming. /oul I an inad&ertent termination of the phase through a spontaneous return to e&eryday reality. Cy les of indire t te hni$ues "" the easiest (ay to enter the phase employed by rapidly alternating certain techni2ues upon a(akening from sleep until one of them (orks.

SC7OO; O/ ;4CID D9E3MING II PE9SON3; EEPE9IENCES

#his 0oo! is the freestanding supple'ent to The School of Astral Projection I A Practical Guidebook. It is intended to gi>e a firsthand de'onstration of the out-of-0ody e*perien e in pra ti eJ 6hile 0ringing attention to orre t a tions and 'ista!es 'ade 6hen out-of-0odyD )tDs one thing to kno( (hich techni2ues can be used to control and lea&e the perception of the body but another thing to actually kno( ho( to use those techni2ues. )tDs one thing to read descriptions of a single indi&idualDs e#periences but another to learn about ho( a large number of other practitioners regard the techni2ues and feel about them. 'ot e&eryone is able to figure out (hat e#actly to do and ho( to do it (ithout reading this book. Techni2ue"related theory and real e#perience are essentially t(o different things. The po(er inherent in this collection of personal practitioner e#periences is such that e&en if you ne&er intend to try out the techni2ues described in it you are practically guaranteed to ne&ertheless encounter this phenomenon as it (ill enter your subconscious mind as a kind of programming that (ill sooner or later acti&ate at the right moment. This collection is all the more beneficial for those (ho (ould like to recei&e real guidance in their e#plorations. 1ll of the fundamental mistakes that practitioners are prone to make are described and analy=ed here. 6a&ing read the book the practitioner (ill be armed (ith kno(ledge of the most distilled and &erified kind. )n preparation for this book the personal e#periences of hundreds of practitioners (ere collected at seminars through the (ebsite and by mail. 6o(e&er only the most demonstrati&e descriptions (ere chosen for inclusion. Thus the selected descriptions are in&aluable not only for those (ho ha&e %ust started out on their %ourney (ith the most e#traordinary practice of out"of"body tra&el but also for those (ho already ha&e substantial e#perience (ith it.

) (ould like to e#press my gratitude to all those (ho assisted me in putting together this one"of"a"kind compilation. Pou ha&e made a contribution to this field of study and it only remains for me to (ish you further success (hich (ill sho( that my commentary on your e#periences (as right on. Michael Raduga Founder of the School of Out-of-Body Travel March 2 , 2 ! Table of ,ontentsPart 1 0ea&ing the Perception of the 5ody Part II Out"of"5ody E#periments Part III The E#periences of .ell"Bno(n 1uthors Part I? 7emonstrati&e ,ase 4tudies 3ppendi*

www.obe4u.com

Proposals regarding translating and publishing this book and other (orks of M.Raduga may be sent to aing@aing.ru

#he real na'e of this 0oo! is KS hool of Out-of-Body #ra>el D 3 Pra ti al Guide0oo!L #his e-0oo! is free >ia NetD Send it to all your friendsF Post it on your sites and 0logsF